act/help/ingen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004024 05165726373 014131 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Inventory
The AccountFlex Inventory module provides a way to keep
track of committed, available, and back-ordered stock.
Below are some of its features:
* Supports multi-warehouses.
* Processes purchase orders and monitors inventory receipts
against outstanding purchase orders. (more)
* Handles shipment and return of inventory items with on-line
updates to stock levels and costs.
* Tracks serial numbers as part of the item shipment process.
* Allows adjustment of inventory by quantities and costs.
* Handles fractional quantities and mixed units of measure
with different units for purchasing, selling, and stock-keeping
(more)
* Supports 3 Costing methods: moving average, FIFO, and
standard costing.
* Tracks items by Vendor account codes or stock location codes.
* Provides unlimited mark-up or discount price levels by
product group and/or customer type. Levels may be set by
percentage or amounts.
* Provides single level bills of materials.
(more)
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as item costs,
prices, on-hand quantities, back-order quantities, etc..
* Supports multiple divisions.
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document codes.
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
(more)
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL
language that is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra,
Micro Focus Cobol, or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary,
this module can be customized by our staff.
act/help/jcgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002023 05276030006 014074 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Job Cost
The AccountFlex Job Cost module provides a way to track labor
and material costs for jobs. By entering estimates of these costs
by job, the user can then track actual costs versus estimates.
Below are some of these features:
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries for job progress and costs.
(more)
* Easy-to-learn menu driven interface with on-line help
information.
* Provides on-screen report viewing.
* Provides clear and concise audit trails.
* Automatically traps errors to ensure data integrity.
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help, on-screen
report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven user interface.
(more)
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/slinv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000032261 07022327677 014166 0 ustar infoflex users !slinv
CUSTOMER SALES ORDER ENTRY
==========================
@invno
Invoice No.
This is the invoice as entered or posted to the system.
Enter here the invoice number being researched.
@trandate
Invoice Date
This is the date the invoice was printed.
@ordno
Order No.
This is the unique order number assigned to each sales
order. This number will automatically be assigned the next
sequential number if you assigned a non zero valueto the
starting order number field in the control file. When
automatic numbering is active the phrase ***AUTO*** appears
in this field.
@orddate
Order Date
The date you wish to have printed on the saled order should
be entered here. The field defaults the system date.
@cusno
Customer
The customer field is where you will enter the customer's
code The customer code must be defined in the customer file
or an error will result. Pressing the HELP function key
will display a list of valid codes. ZOOMING while on the
HELP list will allow you to enter a new customer into the
customer file. When you cursor off the customer code
field, the customer's name and address information will be
displayed on the screen.
@name,addr1,addr2,city,state,zip
These fields represent the customer's address which is
automatically filled based on the customer code. These
fields are not enterable.
@shipcode
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipname
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipstate
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@tax
Tax Code
This data entry field is for entering the tax code.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes. After entering the tax code,the tax code desciption
and tax rate will be displayed on the screen.
@slm
Salesman
This data entry field allows you to enter the salesman code.
Pressing HELP function key will display a list of valid
code. After entering the salesman code, the salesman name
will be displayed on the screen.
@trm
Terms
This data entry field allows to enter the terms code
pressing the HELP function key will display a list fo valid
codes. After entering the terms code,the terms code
description and terms rate will be displayed on the screen.
@shipvia
Ship Via
The carrier used for shipping the order is enterd here.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System_wide control
file. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of
valid codes.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@fob
FOB
This is freight on board description.
@poordno
PO#
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@refinvno
A/R Invoice #
If this order is credited or associated with another invoice
for this customer, enter the invoice number here. When this
order is posted to the A/R system, the amount of this order
will be added to the invoice specified here.
@remarks
Remarks
The remarks field is a data entry field which will print on
the sales order and can be used for special instruction to
the customer.
@status
Status and Status Flags
The status field is set by the system and indicates the
state of the overall order. The program will not allow
you to change the status. You can, however, change the
status indirectly by changing the status flags which will
be discussed later.
The status can have one of three values:
Status Description
----------------------------------------------------
H The order is on HOLD. While on hold status
the pick list report can not be printed and
the order can not be converted to an invoice.
A The order is active but has not completed all
requirements. While on active status the order
can not be converted to an invoice.
C The order is complete and ready to convert.
The status is set based on meeting the order requirements
as defined on the Sales control file (see chapter 3).
The fields located after the status field are the status
flags and indicate the state of each order requirement.
The first four status flags (Ord, Pic, Pak, Auth)
indicate whether the following actions have been done:
Print Order, Print Pick List, Print Packing List, and
Authorize Credit Card. A value of 'Y' in any of these
fields means the action has been done. A value of 'N'
in any of these fields means the action has NOT been
done but is required. A value of blank indicates the
action has NOT been done and it is NOT required.
An 'N' in any of these fields will result in an order
status of 'A' for active. You will not be allowed to
convert Orders with a status of 'A'. Note that these
action status fields may be overiden manually.
The next set of status flags (Fil, Lim, Age) indicate
the results of the following checks: Fill percent,
Credit Limit and Age Credit Limit. A value of 'Y' in
any of these fields means the check has succeeded.
A value of 'N' in any of these flags means the check
has failed. A value of blank means the check has not
been done because it is not required. An 'N' in any
of these fields will result in an order status of 'H'
for hold. Orders on hold will be ignored when printing
picking lists, runnning backorder release, and converting
to invoices. Note that these check status fields may be
overiden manually. In addition to being able to
overide any of these status flags, you can also overide
the minimum fill percent requirement for this specifc
order. This will allow you to accomodate any minimum
fill percent requested by your customers.
The last status flag is the manual hold flag. Setting
this flag to 'Y' will set the order status to 'H' or HOLD.
The order will stay on HOLD until this flag is manually
cleared. There is a 15 character field after the manual
hold flag for entering a reason.
!slinvlin
Line Items
==========
The Line Items screen is for entering each inventory item
ordered and their quantities.
@ordno
Order #
The sales order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@cusno
Customer
The customer ID entered on the prior screen is displayed
here followed by the customer's name.
@orddate
Order Date
The date entered on the prior screen is displayed in this
field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the sales
order.
@invenno
Item
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display a list of valid items. You may add or change
items by pressing the ZOOM function key from the HELP
subsystem.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity being ordered in this field.
@qtyco
Qty Commit
Enter the quantity to commit. The quantity you enter here
must be available in inventory otherwise you will be given a
warning. When this quantity is entered it is no longer
available for other orders.
@qtysh
Qty Shipped
Enter the quantity to ship. You will be given a warning if
the quantity specified is not available or is greater than
the commit quantity.
@price
Price/Unit
Enter the price per unit. This field defaults to the price
defined in the inventory price files. The unit field
displays the unit value from the inventory master.
@priceoext
Ext.Price
The extended price for the committed quantity is displayed
in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the sales order.
@reqdate
Required Date
The required date field is an unlabeled field located below
the commit quantity field. The required date defaults to
the order date and represents the date that the item is
required by the customer.
@taxable
Tax Flag
The tax flag field is an unlabeled field located below the
ship quantity field. The tax flag defaults to whatever the
taxable flag is set to on the inventory file. This flag is
"Y" if the item is taxable and "N" if the item is not
taxable. This field may be overridden by the user.
@
!slship
Ship To Popup
=============
@shp
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@name
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@city
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@st
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@zip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@tax
Tax Code
This field if for the applicable tax rate to be applied
to this order.
@slm
Salesman
This field is for the code of the salesperson to be
normally associated with this ship-to code.
@
!slinvgl
Charges Screen
==============
This screen is for entering other charges associated with
the order.
While on the Charges screen, there are three supporting
screens for entering cash, check, or credit card payments.
All of these supporting screens are only active for lines
having an alias of "B" for bank.
The supporting screen for entering cash information is
accessed by entering an alias of "B" for bank and "$" for
type or by pressing the PAY function key (while on a charge
line with "B" and "$"). The cash entry popup screen will
appear as follows.
@glalia
Alias
Enter the G/L alias code for the charge being entered.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@description
Description
This is a display-only field showing the description for the
G/L alias.
@glprice
Order Price
This is the price based on order quantities.
@glprice2
Commit Price
This is the price based on commit quantities.
@glprice3
Ship Price
This is the price based on ship quantities.
@invno
Invoice No.
This is the invoice as entered or posted to the system.
Enter here the invoice number being researched.
act/help/ascii.doc 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002561 05165726370 014104 0 ustar infoflex users
1) Every ".flx" file will have a corresponding ".hlp" file.
The directory "/act/help" has all the ".flx" files that will
need to be converted to ".hlp" files.
2) Each ".flx" file may have one or more screens; each
screen will have one or more fields.
To find each screen and its fields in the documentation do as follows:
a) If its a report selection screen then locate using the name of
the ".flx" file.
In the case of reports the screen name you will use in the
".hlp" file will always be "select" not the name used in the
document.
b) If its a data entry screen then in most cases you can locate
using the name of the ".flx" file.
This is at least true for the first screen in the "flx"
file. If there is more than one screen in the ".flx" file then
these other screens should be close by in the documentation.
If the name of the screen in the document is different than in the ".flx"
file, always use the screen name defined in the ".flx" file for the
screen name in the ".hlp" file.
3) Screen fields that are marked as "nodisplay" will not
need to be listed in the "hlp" file.
4) Where "\fB" appears replace with "\B" and
where "\fP" appears remove it.
"\B" will indicate Bolding of a word.
sometimes you will need to bold each word within a "\fB", "\fP" range.
act/help/slhisrdi.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005207 05165726412 014650 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY INVOICE DATE
====================================
This menu option is for sales history report by invoice date
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/junk 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000027502 07676611106 013220 0 ustar infoflex users apadjpr1.hlp: A - auxiliary port
apadjpr1.hlp: The auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apadjr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apchkpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apchkr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apchkr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apchkw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apdivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apinvpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apinvpr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apinvr1.hlp: A - auxiliary port
apinvr1.hlp: The auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apopenr1.hlp: name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
apopenr2.hlp: name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
apopenr3.hlp: name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
apregr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apregr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apsubr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aptrial.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apvenr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
apvenr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aradjpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aradjr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
archkpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
archkr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arcusr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arcusr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
ardivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arinvpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arinvr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aropenr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aropenr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
aropenr3.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arregr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arregr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arsthele.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arstmnt.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arsttrop.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
arsubr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
artrial.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glbal.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glcoabr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glcoar.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glcoar1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glcoar2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glincom.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glinvpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glinvpr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glinvr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glinvr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glrptp.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
glrptr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
gltrial.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inactrds.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inactrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inactri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inadjr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inbom2r.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inbomr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
indivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
indmdrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
indmdri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
indmdrw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inhisr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inphyr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inphyr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inphyr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inprcr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inprcr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inprcr3.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inprcr4.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inreorg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inreori.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inreorv.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inreorw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
intfrr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inuserg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inuseri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inuserw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invalrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invalri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invalrw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invenr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invenrd.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
invenrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
inwrkr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcclspr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcclsr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcdivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcjobr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jclbrpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jclbrr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcmtlpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jcmtlr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
jllbrr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
podivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poinvpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poinvr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poordr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poordr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poordr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poordr3.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
poordr4.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
porcvr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
py940ez.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
py941.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pychkpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pychkr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pychkw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pydedr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pydivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyearnr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyempr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyempyr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyempyr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyempyr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyhisr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyhisr10.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyhisr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyinvr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pypchkr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pytaxr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
pyw2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slanarc.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slanarg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slanari.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slanars.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slanarw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrc.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrdr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrs.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrv.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbckrw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokrc.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokrdo.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokrs.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slbokrw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
sldivr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slglr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisrc.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisrdi.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisrg.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisri.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisrs.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slhisrw.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slinvpr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slinvr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slinvr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
sljrnr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
sljrnrc.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slordr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slordr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slpackr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slpickr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slrecr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
slrecr2.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
sltaxr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
tbjobr.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
tbjobr1.hlp: auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
act/help/glincom.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002102 05165726371 014452 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L INCOME STATEMENT
====================
This section discusses how to print your income statement.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@p1
Accounting Period
Enter the period you would like to print.
@y1
Report for Year
Enter the year you would like to print.
act/help/poordr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003675 05165726402 014342 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT P/O ORDERS
================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
This is an additional test line.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the job summary detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO# Range
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want to
print.
@invno2
Ending PO# Range
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date Range
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
PO# Date Range
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/poline.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004633 05165726401 014315 0 ustar infoflex users !polines
Order Detail Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
==================================
@invno
Purchase Order #
The purchase order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@venno
Vendor
The vendor ID entered on the prior screen is displayed here
followed by the vendor's name.
@trandate
Order
The date entered on the prior screen is displayed in this
field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the purchase
order.
@invenno
Item Number
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display the contents of the Inventory Master file, and
you can use the ZOOM function from the HELP table to Add to
or Change the Inventory Master file.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field defaults to the vendor part number in the
Inventory Master file, however, alphanumeric characters can
be entered into this field.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity you are ordering in this field.
@qtyre
Qty Rec
This field is empty until goods are received on the purchase
order.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit ordered. This value will print on
the purchase order and defaults to the cost value contained
in the inventory master file. The unit field displays the
unit value from the inventory master.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the purchase order.
@jobno
Job Number
The job number for which this product is being ordered
should be entered here. If there is no job number being
used, and the product is for stock replenishment, leave this
field blank.
@etadate
Estimated Arrival Date
Enter here the estimated arrival date of the order. If a
job number entry was made in the last field, the date shown
here will be the earliest date entered under the jobs
fields.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Warehouse
This field is the warehouse as identified on the first page
of the p/o entry form.
act/help/apinvpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003245 05165726362 014573 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P INVOICE POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the range of vendor codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a vendor range the computer will print
all vendor.
act/help/apinvpr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003522 05165726362 014572 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P INVOICE DISTRIBUTION
========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
The post number field is for viewing only.
@trandat1
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@perdate2
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like to
print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending range of vendor codes you would like to
print.
act/help/jcmtlpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002444 05165726400 014560 0 ustar infoflex users !select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/slrecp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002032 05165726414 014312 0 ustar infoflex users !select
CONVERT QUOTES TO ORDERS
========================
This menu option is for convert quotes to orders
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@qteno1
Begining Quote Number
Enter the begining quote range for the customers you
wish to print.
@qteno2
Ending Quote Number
Enter the ending quote range for the customers you
wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@delete
Delete After Conversion
Enter "Y" here if you wish the qoutations to be deleted
after being converted to an order. This field defaults to
"N" so that quotation may be kept on file for continual
conversion to orders in the event that this is a recurring
order.
act/help/slbokrdo.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005174 05165726411 014650 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY ORDER DATE
=============================
This menu option is for booking report by item,order date
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/invalrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007311 05165726376 014500 0 ustar infoflex users !select
VALUATION REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM
===============================
This menu option is for usage valuation report by group
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should include warehouse subtotals on the
report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/aradj.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010324 06653657552 014117 0 ustar infoflex users !aradj
A/R ADJUSTMENT BATCH ENTRY
==========================
This section describes the process of entering adjustments
for invoices into your Accounts Receivable program.
amount.
Adjustments are entered in groups or batches. Each batch may
consist of one or more adjustments; each adjustment may have
one or more distributions.
@m
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the adjustment: "S-I" stands for Sales
Adjustment, and "R-A" stands for Accounts Receivable
Adjustment.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of adjustments for both editing
and auditing purposes.
@batdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@batchtotal
The total field will display the total of all adjustments
within the batch.
!ardist
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save the batch screen. The invoice and
screen.
@invno
Invoice
The invoice number represents the number of the
invoice that is being adjusted.
@cusno
Customer Code
The customer code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the customer table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@trandate
Adjustment Date
The invoice date will default to the system date. The
commenced.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date The
period date represents the period that the invoice should be
posted.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@poordno
PO#
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@tran2dat
Invoice Date
The field will default to the original Invoice Date.
Changing this date will override the original Invoice Date.
@discdate
Discount Date
This is not a required entry field. If the invoice is paid
by the discount date the discount allowed will be deducted
from the amount due.
@discallow
Discount Allowed
This is not a required entry field. The discount is the
amount that should be deducted from the invoice if paid by
the discount date. The field allows a 9-character numeric
entry.
@duedate
Due Date
This is not a required entry field. The due date represents
the date that the invoice must be paid before it becomes
past due.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The description allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 characters.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the Invoice screen. The cursor will
then jump to the distribution screen where the distributions
relating to the invoice should be entered.
Below is a description of each field.
Distribution Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
@glcode
Account #
Enter the Account Code. You can use up to 12 characters
including the delimeter. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@gldesc
Account Title
The account title will automatically be displayed and is a
non entry field.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
A positive value will credit the G/L Account and a negative
value will debit it.
@totamount
Total
The Total field will display the total amount of all
Distributions within this Invoice.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the distribution screen. The cursor
will then jump back to the invoice screen to enter another
invoice. If there are no more invoices to be entered, you
may return to the batch screen by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Pressing the ESCAPE key while on the batch screen will ret
to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/apregr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004150 05165726363 014371 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P CHECK REGISTER BY VENDOR
============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning vendor range that you want to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor range that you want to print.
@rptgl
List G/L Accounts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list G/L accounts.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the ending range of check date that you want to print.
All transactions will print that have a Check date between
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range the
computer will default and print everything.
act/help/apregr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004125 05165726363 014374 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P CHECK REGISTER
===================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning vendor range that you want to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor range that you want to print.
@rptgl
List G/L Accounts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list G/L accounts.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the ending range of check date that you want to print.
All transactions will print that have a Check date between
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range the
computer will default and print everything.
act/help/invalri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007276 05165726376 014514 0 ustar infoflex users !select
VALUATION REPORT BY ITEM
=========================
This menu option is for usage valuation report by item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should include warehouse subtotals on the
report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/slordp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001400 05165726414 014323 0 ustar infoflex users !select
CONVERT ORDERS TO INVOIVES
==========================
This menu option is for convert orders to invoices
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@ordno1
Starting Order Number
Enter the begining order range for the customers you
wish to print.
@ordno2
Ending Order Number
Enter the ending order range for the customers you
wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/glinvp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001244 05165726372 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !select
This section describes how to post your batches to the
General Ledger. Posting the transactions moves the data from
the transaction files (Short-Term) to the General Ledger
files (Long-Term). The transaction data must be posted in
order for it to show up on the financial reports. Also, it
is important that your transactions be correctly entered
before posting. This is because once your data has been
posted it can no longer be modified unless you enter an new
transaction to offset the original entry.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin posting or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
act/help/jcmtl.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007002 05165726377 014145 0 ustar infoflex users !jcmtl
JOBCOST MATERIAL ENTRY
======================
Materials are applied to or deducted from jobs in groups or
batches; each batch may consist of one or more entries.
%
@batch
Batch
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to uniquely identify a group of entries for both
editing and auditing purposes. To return to an existing
batch, press the CHG function key then press the NEXT
function key until the correct batch is displayed.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date. The
period date represents the period into which the batch
should be posted.
@jobno
Job Number (source)
This is the job which will be affected by this enty. If the
second job number is also filled in, then product will be
removed from this job and trasfered to the second job. If
no second job number is supplied than product will either be
added to or subtracted from this job, depending upon the
sign of the quantity. A + quantity will add to this job and
reduce inventory quantity on hand; while a - quantity will
subtract from this job and add to the inventory quantity o
This is a required entry. (press HELP to see list)
@jobno2
Job Number (destination)
This job number is optional. It should only be entered when
material is to be transfered from one job to another. See
HELP for "Job Number (source)". (press HELP to see list)
@whs
Warehouse
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System-wide control file.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified in the warehouse file. This field will only appear
if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@invenno
Item
The item field is a data entry field where your item number
for the item being adjusted is entered. The HELP function
displays the contents of the Inventory Master file.
@trandate
Transaction Date
The transaction date defaults to the system date. The
transaction date represents the date assigned to the line
item.
@description
Remarks
This field is for entering a brief description of the
reasons for the adjustment.
@qty
Quantity
Enter the quantity to be acted upon. If there is sufficient
inventory quantity on hand and the quantity is positive,
this quantity will be deducted from on hand quantity and
added to the job total. If the quantity is negative,
inventory quantity on hand will be incremented by this
quantity and the job total reduced. If this is a material
transfer from on job to another, there must be sufficient
quantity assigned to the sending job.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit. The weighted average cost will be
displayed by default. The Unit field displays the unit value
from the Inventory Master.
@costext
!inserial
SERIAL # ASSIGNMENT
===================
@serialno
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of each unit affected by this
material entry . This must be a valid serial no. for this
inventory item.
@operation
Action
Enter the action being performed by this material entry of
A=Add, D=Delete, or R=Return. No other entries are
permitted. This is a required entry.
@venno
Vendor Code
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the system.
act/help/inven2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000015525 06615131306 014225 0 ustar infoflex users !inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@description
Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@weight
Unit Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if you wish to build the
item at sales order time. You should assign an "N" if either
there is no bill of materials or the item is pre-asembled
and added to inventory prior to entering sales orders.
Note that you must have installed the BOM module and
set have the BOM module flag to "Y" on the system-wide
control file.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!inserial
@solddate
Date Sold
This is the date the item was sold or deleted from the
inventory.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@serialno
Serial Number
This is the serial number of each unit on hand.
@recdate
Date Received
If this unit was recieved on a purchase order, this is the
date of the receipt.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item was received.
@cost
Cost
The purchase cost for this item.
@cusno
Customer Number
This is the customer number of the customer to whom the item
was sold.
@price
Sold Price
This is the price charged to the customer.
!inwserial
@solddate
Date Sold
This is the date the item was sold or deleted from the
inventory.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@serialno
Serial Number
This is the serial number of each unit on hand.
@recdate
Date Received
If this unit was recieved on a purchase order, this is the
date of the receipt.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item was received.
@cost
Cost
The purchase cost for this item.
@cusno
Customer Number
This is the customer number of the customer to whom the item
was sold.
@price
Sold Price
This is the price charged to the customer.
!note
NOTES POPUP
===========
@note
Notes
You may enter as many note lines as you wish. The notepad
screen operates exactly like the MULTI-RECORD entry screens.
When you are finished entering notes press the SAVE key to
return to the inventory entry screen.
act/help/invalrw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007326 05165726376 014526 0 ustar infoflex users !select
VALUATION REPORT BY WAREHOUSE, ITEM
===================================
This menu option is for usage valuation report by warehouse
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should include warehouse subtotals on the
report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/arstmnt.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006372 05165726370 014526 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT STATEMENTS
================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate1
Beginning Transaction Date
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate2
Ending Transaction Date
Enter the ending range of transaction date you would like to
print.All transactions having a transaction date between the
specified range will be printed. Transactions prior to the
starting date will be summarized as beginning balances. If
you do not enter a date range the computer will print all
transactions.
@balance1
Low Balance to Omit
Enter the beginning of customer balance range you would like
to omit.
@balance2
High Balance to Omit
Enter the ending of customer balance range that you would
like to omit. If you do not enter a Balance range the
computer will print all customers.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
@agetype
Age by (T)ransaction, (P)eriod, (D)ue, or (X)Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
@age0
Ageing Period 1.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age1
Ageing Period 2.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age2
Ageing Period 3.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age3
Ageing Period 4.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age4
Ageing Period 5.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
act/help/arinvp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002567 05165726367 014345 0 ustar infoflex users !select
Post Invoice Batches
This section describes how to post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Receivable. It is important that
your invoices be correctly entered before posting. This is
because once your data has been posted it can no longer be
modified unless you enter and post an adjustments using
option 5 on the menu.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin POSTING or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the invoice will be displayed here. The source
represents where the transaction originated (R=Receivable
and S=Sales).
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
Invoice
The invoice number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
When the posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/inglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002447 05165726373 014234 0 ustar infoflex users !select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/jcglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002450 05165726377 014220 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/glinv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007477 06602171255 014155 0 ustar infoflex users !glinv
G/L BATCH TRANSACTION
=====================
This screen is for the process of entering transactions into
your General Ledger program.
Transactions are entered in groups or batches. Each batch
may consist of one or more transactions; each transaction
may have one or more distributions.
@source
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the transaction: "G-I" stands for General
Ledger Transaction, and "R-I" stands for Accounts Receivable
Invoice.
@batch
Batch
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of transactions for both editing
and auditing purposes. To return to an existing batch, press
the CHG function key then press the NEXT function key until
the correct batch is displayed.
@batdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@batchdebit
D/C
The debit/credit field will display the total debit and
credit balances for all transactions within the batch.
!gldist
G/L DISTRIBUTION SCREEN
=======================
The transaction and distribution screen will then appear
below the batch screen.
@invno
Transaction Number
The transaction number is automatically assigned while in
ADD mode, but can be changed while in CHANGE mode. To
change, press the CHG function key. The transaction number
represents a number assigned to a transaction made up of
possibly several distributions. The transaction field is
alphanumeric and can be a maximum of 10 characters.
@refcod
Refcode
The reference code is not a required entry field. This field
can be used to identify the transaction in a unique way for
audit trail purposes.
Note that transactions posted from A/R or Sales will
have the Vendor code assigned to this field.
Transactions posted from A/P or Purchase Order
will have the Vendor code assigned to this field.
@trandate
Transaction Date
The transaction date will default to the system date. The
transaction date represents the date the transaction
commenced.
@perdate
Period
The period date will also default to the system date. The
period date represents the period that the transaction
should be posted.
@description
Description
The transaction description field is not a required entry.
The description can be used to identify the types of
transactions entered and can be a maximum of 40 alphanumeric
characters.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE key
to save the transaction screen. The cursor will then jump to
the distribution screen where the distributions relating to
the transaction should be entered.
@glcode
Account #
Enter the account number so that it is consistant with the
account code format specified in the System-wide control
file. You can use up to 12 characters including the
delimeter.
@gldesc
Description
The account description will automatically be displayed and
is a non entry field.
@reference
Reference
Account reference is an optional field that can be used for
descriptive information. This field can be a maximum of 10
characters.
@debit
Debit
Enter the debit amount.
@credit
Credit
Enter the credit amount.
Totals
This field displays the total credit and debit for the
tranaction.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE key
to save the distribution screen. The cursor will then jump
back to the transaction screen to enter another transaction.
If there are no more transactions to be entered, you may
return to the batch screen by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Pressing the ESCAPE key while on the batch screen will
return you to the General Ledger menu.
act/help/poinvr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004056 05165726401 014343 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT P/O INVOICES
==================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Job distribution detail should be printed on the report.
@rptserial
Report Serials
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Serial Number detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO#
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
Ending PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
Ending PO# Date
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/poinv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006473 05165726400 014165 0 ustar infoflex users !poinv
PURCHASE ORDER INVOICING
========================
This screen is for entering invoices for purchase orders.
These invoices will be automatically checked to see that
goods have been received with the correct charges. Also, the
invoice information will be posted to the Account Payable
module for payment.
@invno
Purchase Order #
Enter the purchase order number into this field. After
checking to see that this is a valid purchase order, the
display fields originating from this purchase order will be
displayed.
@orddate
Order Date
The order date displays the purchase order date from the
purchase order.
@1
Status
The status field indicates wether purchase order status is
open or closed.
@venno
Vendor
This field displays the vendor ID and name from the purchase
order.
@veninvno
Vendor Invoice
Enter the vendor's invoice number into this field. It will
accommodate up to 12 characters.
@trandate
Invoice Date
Enter the invoice date into this field.
@perdate
Period Date
Enter the period date into this field. This date determines
the month to which the G/L activity will post.
@tax
Tax
Enter the amount of tax included on this invoice.
@freight
Freight
Enter the amount of freight included on the invoice.
@misc
Misc
Enter the amount of miscellaneous charges included on the
invoice.
@discount
Discounts
Enter the amount of discount allowed on the invoice into
this field.
@totcost
INVOICE TOTAL
This is a calculated field that is the sum of the Tax,
Freight, Misc, Discounts, and the total of the Ext.Cost
fields.
@lno
Line
The Line field contains the line number from the purchase
order. Press Enter and the cursor will jump to the Qty Rec
field for this line item number.
@qtydue
Qty Due
This field displays the Quantity due from the vendor on this
Purchase Order.
@qtyinvoice
Qty Inv
Enter the quantity invoiced in this field.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit invoiced. The cost will default
value to the cost on the last purchase ordeer The unit of
measure is obtained from the inventory file.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
@vinvenno
Vendor Item
This field displays the vendor item number entered on the
purchase order to this vendor
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field displays the description
from the purchase order.
@s
Item Status
This unlabeled field shows the status of this line item,
Open or Closed.
@qtyor
Ord
The Ord field displays the quantity ordered on the purchase
order.
@qtyre
Rec
The Rec Field shows the quantity received to date.
@qtyin
Inv
The Inv field displays the quantity of the line item that
have been invoiced to date.
@costexttot
Totals
The Totals Field contains the sum of the extended costs for
each of the Line Items.
!pojob
JOB DISTRIBUTION
================
This screen is for entering the job assignments for the
products.
@jobno
Job Number
This is a number assigned to a job in progress.
@qtyor
Qty Due
This field displays the Quantity due from the vendor on this
Purchase Order.
@etadate
Due Date
Enter the date this job is due to be completed.
@qtyin
Qty Inv
Enter the quantity invoiced in this field.
act/help/appurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003126 05165726363 014475 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@iolddate
Last Purge Date.
This is a non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@ipurdate
New Purge Date
Enter the New Purge Date. All invoices paid prior to this
date will be purged.
@rolddate
Last purge check regiter date.
This is a non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@rpurdate
Purge Check Register
New purge check register date.
Enter new purge date. All invoices paid prior to this date
will be purge.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter beginning vendor range.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor range. If you do not enter a range
the computer will default and print all vendors. These codes
must exist in the vendor table.
@passname
Processing statitics
@venno
The vendor number that is currently being processed will be
displayed here.
request id is ljp-1892 (standard input)
Purge
This section describes the process of Purging Data from the
Accounts Payable system.
Press the SAVE key to begin PURGING or press the ESCAPE key
to EXIT. Please make a note of the instructions displayed on
the screen.
As the Purging takes place, the screen fields will display
the following information:
The vendor number that is currently being processed will be
displayed here.
When the Purging has been completed you will see the
following message:
Purging has been Successfully Completed
Once this message appears you may press the ESCAPE key to
return to the Accounts Payable menu.
act/help/apadjpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003253 05165726361 014533 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P ADJUSTMENT POSTING JOURNAL
==============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter report destination. Four options are available:
S - screen
P - printer
D - disk
A - auxiliary port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers
you would enter the printer's device name after the "P".
The auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of reports copies you want. One to ten
copies can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
a title page should be printed for the report. A report
title page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen
with the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the range of vendor codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a vendor range the computer will print
all vendors.
act/help/inadj.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005454 05165726373 014126 0 ustar infoflex users !inadj
INVENTORY ADJUSTMENTS
=====================
Adjustments are entered in groups or batches; each batch
consisting of one or more adjustments. To enter an
adjustment batch select option 1 on the Inventory
@source
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
source of the transaction: "I-A" stands for Inventory
Adjustment.
@batch
Batch
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to uniquely identify a group of adjustment entries
for both editing and auditing purposes. To return to an
existing batch, press the CHG function key then press the
NEXT function key until the correct batch is displayed.
@entdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@trandate
Transaction Date
The transaction date defaults to the system date. The
transaction date represents the date assigned to the line
item.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date. The
period date represents the period that the receipt should be
posted.
@lno
Line
The Line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented for each adjustment line.
@whs
Warehouse
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System-wide control file.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified in the warehouse file. This field will only appear
if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@invenno
Item
The item field is a data entry field where your item number
for the item being adjusted is entered. The HELP function
displays the contents of the Inventory Master file.
@description
Remarks
This field is for entering a brief description of the
reasons for the adjustment.
@qty
Quantity
Enter the adjustment quantity.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit. The weighted average cost will be
displayed by default. The Unit field displays the unit value
from the Inventory Master.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
!inserial
SERIAL # ASSIGNMENT
===================
@serialno
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of each unit affected by this
adjustment.
@operation
Action
Enter the action being performed by this adjustment of
A=Add, D=Delete, or R=Return. No other entries are
permitted. This is a required entry.
@venno
Vendor Code
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the system.
act/help/poship.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001001 05165726402 014314 0 ustar infoflex users !poship
SHIP TO ADDRESSES SCREEN
========================
Note that the first shipping address entered on this screen
will become the default address for all purchase orders.
@shp
Code
This is the ship-to code that identifies the shipping
address you are about to enter.
@name
Name
Enter the ship-to name.
@address1
Address1
Enter the ship-to address.
@city
City
Enter the ship-to city.
@st
State
Enter the ship-to state.
@zip
Zip Code
Enter the ship-to Zip Code.
act/help/slinveni.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004373 05165726413 014662 0 ustar infoflex users !slinveni
INVENTORY INQUIRY SCREEN
========================
@invenno
Inventory Code
Enter the item number you are researching. The item number
must be defined in the inventory file. The HELP function key
is operable for this field and will display the Inventory
Master.
Pressing the SAVE function key after you have selected a
part number will cause the On-order screen to appear as
shown below.
!slordi
The fields on this screen are display only fields and are
intended for use in ascertaining the status of items on open
sales orders.
@reqdate
ETA Date
The ETA Date field displays the estimated time of arrival
date from the sales order Detail file.
@cusno
Customer
The customer field displays the customer code from the open
sales orders.
@cusname
Name
The Name field shows the customers name from the customer
master file.
@qtyor
Qty Order
The Qty Order field indicates the quantity currently on open
Purchase Orders whether received or not.
@qtysh
Qty Rec
Qty Rec shows the quantity of this item that has been
received.
@qtydue
Qty Due
Qty Due is the difference between Qty Order and Qty Rec,
that is how many more are due to arrive.
@contact
Customer Contact
The customer contact name from the customer master file.
@phone
Customer Phone
The customer's phone number from the customer master file.
!slinvi
@trandate
Order Date
The date of the open sales order is displayed here.
@invno
Invoice Number
The date of the invoice that used this item.
@cusno
Customer
The customer field displays the customer code from the open
sales orders.
@orddate
Date Ordered
The date of the open sales order.
@ordno
Order Number
The Order number of the open line item.
@whs
Warehouse
The warehouse the invoice was drawn upon.
@cusname
Name
The Name field shows the customers name from the Accounts
Payable customer master file.
@qtysh
Qty Ordered
The Qty Ordered field indicates the quantity ordered whether
received or not.
@price
Price
This is the sale price of the item.
@contact
Customer Contact
The customer contact name from the customer file.
@phone
Customer Phone
The customer's phone number from the customer file.
act/help/slinvp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000750 05165726413 014341 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT POSTINT JOURNAL
=====================
@pass
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data and pass 3
clears the data.
@pbatch
Source and Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
@pinvno
Invoice Number
The invoice number being processed is displayed here.
act/help/apadjr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004020 05165726361 014344 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P ADJUSTMENT BATCH LISTING
============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated (P=Payable or O=Orders).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the range of vendor codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a vendor range the computer will print
all vendor.
act/help/inphyr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003360 05165726374 014345 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PHYSICAL COUNT VARIANCE BATCH LISTING
=====================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@m
This is not a required entry field. The source represents where
the transaction originated.
@batch1
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Dates
Enter the range of inventory item numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an item numbers range the
computer will print all inventory items. You may press the
HELP function key to view the list of valid items numbers.
act/help/invenr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005323 05165726376 014340 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
INVENTORY BY ITEM
=================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Code
Enter the first Item Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Item Code
Enter the last Item Code to report on.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
act/help/jclbrpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002142 05165726377 014553 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
JOB COST LABOR BATCH LISTING
============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
act/help/slpurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001604 05165726414 014507 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PURGE INVOICES BY INVOICE DATE
==============================
This menu option (43) is for purging sales invoices. Note
that purged sales invoices will no longer be included on
sales report. At a minimun you will want to retain the
last quarter's invoices for generating quaterly report
(in particular the quarterly tax report).
@holdate
Last purge date
This is an non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@hpurdate
New purge date
Enter the New Purge Date. All sales invoices posted prior to
this date will be purged.
@invno1
Invoice no. range.
You may optionally enter a specific range of invoice numbers
to purge. If you do not then all posted invoiced will be
purged prior to the purge date entered above.
The sales invoice number that is currently being processed
will be displayed as the purging process takes place.
act/help/slship.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002434 05165726414 014332 0 ustar infoflex users !slship
SHIP-TO ENTRY SCREEN
====================
@cusno
The customer field is where you will enter the customer's
code The customer code must be difined in the customer file
or an error will result.Pressing the HELP function key will
display a list of valid codes.ZOOMING while on the HELP list
will allow you to enter a new customer into the customer
file.When you cursor off the customer code field,the
customer's name and address information will be displayed on
the screen.
@name,addr1,addr2,city,state,zip
These fields represent the customer's address which is automatically
filled based on the customer code.These fields are not
enterable.
@shp
This is the code representing where the order is to be shipped.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@tax
This data entry fields is for entering the tax code.Pressing
the HELP function key will display a list of valid codes.
After entering the tax code,the tax code desciption and tax
rate will be displayed on the screen.
@slm
This data entry field allows you to enter the salesman code.
Pressing HELP function key will display a list of valid
code. After entering the salesman code, the salesman name
will be displayed on the screen.
act/help/pydivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001371 05165726404 014343 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@div
Department Code
Enter department code. If no department code is entered,
all departments will be reported.
act/help/slsale.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000341 05165726414 014306 0 ustar infoflex users !slsale
SALESMAN ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
%
%
@sl
Salesman's Code
Enter the salesman code to uniquely identify the salesman
on orders and invoices.
@name
Salesman's Name
Enter the salesman name.
act/help/apinv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000011000 05165726362 014134 0 ustar infoflex users !apinv
A/P INVOICE BATCH ENTRY
=======================
@s
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the adjustment: "S-I" stands for Sales
Adjustment,and "R-A" stands for Accounts Payable Adjustment.
@batchtotal
The total field will display the total of all adjustments
within the batch.
This section describes the process of entering invoices into
your Accounts Payable program.
Invoices are entered in groups or batches. Each batch may
consist of one or more invoices; each invoice may have any
number of distributions.
@m
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the transaction: "S-I" stands for Sales
Invoice, and "R-I" stands for Accounts Receivable Invoice.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of invoices for both editing and
auditing purposes. To return to an existing batch, press the
CHG function key then press the NEXT function key until the
correct batch is displayed.
@batdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@batchtotal
The total field will display the total amount of all
invoices within the batch.
!apdist
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save the batch screen. The invoice and
screen.
@invno
Invoice
The vendor's invoice number must be entered here. The
invoice field can accept a maximum of 10 alphanumeric
characters.
@venno
Vendor Code
The vendor code is a required entry field. The maximum entry
is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in the
customer table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The invoice date will default to the system date. The
commenced.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date The
period date represents the period that the invoice should be
posted.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@poordno
PO#
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@discdate
Discount Date
This is not a required entry field. If the invoice is paid
by the discount date the discount allowed will be deducted
from the amount due.
@discallow
Discount Allowed
This is not a required entry field. The discount is the
amount that should be deducted from the invoice if paid by
the discount date. The field allows a 9-character numeric
entry.
@duedate
Due Date
This is not a required entry field. The due date represents
the date that the invoice must be paid before it becomes
past due.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The description allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 characters.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the Invoice screen. The cursor will
then jump to the distribution screen where the distributions
relating to the invoice should be entered.
Below is a description of each field.
Distribution Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
@glcode
Account #
Enter the Account Code. You can use up to 12 characters
including the delimeter. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@gldesc
Account Title
The account title will automatically be displayed and is a
non entry field.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
A positive value will credit the G/L Account and a negative
value will debit it.
@totamount
Total
The Total field will display the total amount of all
Distributions within this Invoice.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the distribution screen. The cursor
will then jump back to the invoice screen to enter another
invoice. If there are no more invoices to be entered, you
may return to the batch screen by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Pressing the ESCAPE key while on the batch screen will ret
to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/pobuy.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000265 05165726400 014161 0 ustar infoflex users !pobuy
BUYER ENTRY SCREEN
==================
@buy
Buyer Code
Enter the buyer code to uniquely identify the buyer on
orders.
@name
Name
Enter the buyer name.
act/help/apclean.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000564 05165726362 014437 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@a
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to correct errors.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor range that you want to view.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor range that you want to view.
@passname
Processing statitics.
@venno
Enter vendor name.
act/help/ingrp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000277 05165726373 014156 0 ustar infoflex users !ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
act/help/tbjobr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003057 05165726415 014315 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@jobno1
Beginning Job Number
Enter the number of the first job you would like included on
this report. If no job numbers are entered, all jobs will
be included on the report.
@jobno2
Ending Job Number
Enter the number of the last job you would like included on
this report. If a beginning number was specified and no
ending number was specified, then only the beginning number
job will be on the report. If no beginning number is
specified and an ending number is specified, then all jobs
up to the ending number will be included on the report.
act/help/slrec.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000027546 07022327717 014150 0 ustar infoflex users !slrec
QUOTE ENTRY SCREEN
==================
@ordno
This is the unique order number assigned to each sales
order. This number will automatically be assigned the next
sequential number if you assigned a non zero valueto the
starting order number field in the control file.When
automatic numbering is active the phrase ***AUTO*** appears
in this field.
@qteno
Enter the quote number.
@orddate
The date you wish to have printed on the saled order should
be entered here.The field defaults the system date.
@cusno
The customer field is where you will enter the customer's
code The customer code must be difined in the customer file
or an error will result.Pressing the HELP function key will
display a list of valid codes.ZOOMING while on the HELP list
will allow you to enter a new customer into the customer
file.When you cursor off the customer code field,the
customer's name and address information will be displayed on
the screen.
@company,addr1,addr2,city,state,zip
These fields represent the customer's address which is
automatically filled based on the customer code.These
fields are not enterable.
@shipcode
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipcompany
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped.These fields may be assigned as a result of entering
a ship-to code or may be enterd directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipstate
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@tax
Tax Code
This data entry fields is for entering the tax code.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes. After entering the tax code,the tax code desciption
and tax rate will be displayed on the screen.
@slm
This data entry field allows you to enter the salesman code.
Pressing HELP function key will display a list of valid
code. After entering the salesman code, the salesman name
will be displayed on the screen.
@trm
This data entry field allows to enter the terms code
pressing the HELP function key will display a list fo valid
codes. After entering the terms code,the terms code
description and terms rate will be displayed on the screen.
@shipvia
The carrier used for shipping the order is enterd here.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System_wide control
file.Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of
valid codes.
@div
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered.This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file. Pressing HELP function key will
display a list of valid codes.
@fob
This is freight on board description.
@poordno
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@refinvno
If this order is credited or associated with another invoice
for this customer,enter the invoice number here. When this
order is posted to the A/R system,the amount of this order
will be added to the invoice specified here.
@remarks
The remarks field is a data entry field which will print on
the sales order and can be used for special instruction to
the customer.
@status
Status and Status Flags
The status field is set by the system and indicates the
state of the overall order. The program will not allow
you to change the status. You can, however, change the
status indirectly by changing the status flags which will
be discussed later.
The status can have one of three values:
Status Description
----------------------------------------------------
H The order is on HOLD. While on hold status
the pick list report can not be printed and
the order can not be converted to an invoice.
A The order is active but has not completed all
requirements. While on active status the order
can not be converted to an invoice.
C The order is complete and ready to convert.
The status is set based on meeting the order requirements
as defined on the Sales control file (see chapter 3).
The fields located after the status field are the status
flags and indicate the state of each order requirement.
The first four status flags (Ord, Pic, Pak, Auth)
indicate whether the following actions have been done:
Print Order, Print Pick List, Print Packing List, and
Authorize Credit Card. A value of 'Y' in any of these
fields means the action has been done. A value of 'N'
in any of these fields means the action has NOT been
done but is required. A value of blank indicates the
action has NOT been done and it is NOT required.
An 'N' in any of these fields will result in an order
status of 'A' for active. You will not be allowed to
convert Orders with a status of 'A'. Note that these
action status fields may be overiden manually.
The next set of status flags (Fil, Lim, Age) indicate
the results of the following checks: Fill percent,
Credit Limit and Age Credit Limit. A value of 'Y' in
any of these fields means the check has succeeded.
A value of 'N' in any of these flags means the check
has failed. A value of blank means the check has not
been done because it is not required. An 'N' in any
of these fields will result in an order status of 'H'
for hold. Orders on hold will be ignored when printing
picking lists, runnning backorder release, and converting
to invoices. Note that these check status fields may be
overiden manually. In addition to being able to
overide any of these status flags, you can also overide
the minimum fill percent requirement for this specifc
order. This will allow you to accomodate any minimum
fill percent requested by your customers.
The last status flag is the manual hold flag. Setting
this flag to 'Y' will set the order status to 'H' or HOLD.
The order will stay on HOLD until this flag is manually
cleared. There is a 15 character field after the manual
hold flag for entering a reason.
!slship
Ship To Popup
=============
@shipcode
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@company
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@city
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@st
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@zip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
!slreclin
Line Items
==========
The Line Items screen is for entering each inventory item
ordered and their quantities.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the sales
order.
@invenno
Item
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display a list of valid items. You may add or change
items by pressing the ZOOM function key from the HELP
subsystem.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity being ordering in this field.
@qtysh
Enter the quantity to quote. The quantity you enter here
need not be available in inventory and has no effect on
the inventory.
@price
Price/Unit
Enter the price per unit. This field defaults to the price
defined in the inventory price files. The unit field
displays the unit value from the inventory master.
@priceoext
Ext.Price
The extended price for the committed quantity is displayed
in this field.
@description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the sales order.
@reqdate
Required Date
The required date field is an unlabeled field located below
the commit quantity field. The required date defaults to
the order date and represents the date that the item is
required by the customer.
@t
Tax Flag
The tax flag field is an unlabeled field located below the
ship quantity field. The tax flag defaults to whatever the
taxable flag is set to on the inventory file. This flag is
"Y" if the item is taxable and "N" if the item is not
taxable. This field may be overridden by the user.
!slrecgl
Charges Screen
==============
This screen is for entering other charges associated with
the order.
While on the Charges screen, there are three supporting
screens for entering cash, check, or credit card payments.
All of these supporting screens are only active for lines
having an alias of "B" for bank.
The supporting screen for entering cash information is
accessed by entering an alias of "B" for bank and "$" for
type or by pressing the PAY function key (while on a charge
line with "B" and "$"). The cash entry popup screen will
appear as follows.
@glalia
Alias
Enter the G/L alias code for the charge being entered.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@description
Description
This is a display-only field showing the description for the
G/L alias.
@glprice
Order Price
This is the price based on order quantities.
act/help/inven.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000015236 10045524415 014141 0 ustar infoflex users !inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@description
Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@weight
Unit Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@inventype
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item or "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
You will also assign "N" if you are building the
item at sales order time. The bill of materials will
be copied to the sales order if this flag is "N" and
you have created a bill of materials for this item.
@serialized
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@taxable
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@discountable
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@reorderflag
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@price_base
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@price_discount
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@pricecode
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!inserial
@solddate
Date Sold
This is the date the item was sold or deleted from the
inventory.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@serialno
Serial Number
This is the serial number of each unit on hand.
@recdate
Date Received
If this unit was recieved on a purchase order, this is the
date of the receipt.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item was received.
@cost
Cost
The purchase cost for this item.
@cusno
Customer Number
This is the customer number of the customer to whom the item
was sold.
@price
Sold Price
This is the price charged to the customer.
!inwserial
@solddate
Date Sold
This is the date the item was sold or deleted from the
inventory.
@whs
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@serialno
Serial Number
This is the serial number of each unit on hand.
@recdate
Date Received
If this unit was recieved on a purchase order, this is the
date of the receipt.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item was received.
@cost
Cost
The purchase cost for this item.
@cusno
Customer Number
This is the customer number of the customer to whom the item
was sold.
@price
Sold Price
This is the price charged to the customer.
!note
NOTES POPUP
===========
@note
Notes
You may enter as many note lines as you wish. The notepad
screen operates exactly like the MULTI-RECORD entry screens.
When you are finished entering notes press the SAVE key to
return to the inventory entry screen.
act/help/aptrial.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007320 05165726363 014466 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P AGING REPORT
================
This section describes how to print your Aged Trial Balance
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the Aged Trial Report as shown
below.
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Accounts Receivable menu.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor range you would like to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor range that you want to print.
@stdate1
Beginning Transaction Date
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate2
Ending Transaction Date
Enter the ending range of transaction date you would like to
print.All transactions having a transaction date between the
specified range will be printed. Transactions prior to the
starting date will be summarized as beginning balances. If
you do not enter a date range the computer will print all
transactions.
@balance1
Low Balance to Omit
Enter the beginning of customer balance range you would like
to omit.
@balance2
High Balance to Omit
Enter the ending of customer balance range that you would
like to omit. If you do not enter a Balance range the
computer will print all customers.
@agetype
Age by (T)ransaction, (P)eriod, (D)ue, or (X)Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
@age0
Ageing Period 1.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age1
Ageing Period 2.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age2
Ageing Period 3.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age3
Ageing Period 4.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age4
Ageing Period 5.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
act/help/jcclspr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002043 05165726377 014555 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
act/help/pychk2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000014420 05165726403 014224 0 ustar infoflex users !pychk
CHECK ENTRY SCREEN
==================
@empno
Employee Code
The employee code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the employee table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@
Pay Group Code
This is a display-only field showing the pay group code
assigned to this employee.
@
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period there will be
no automatic deductions taken on checks.
@
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range you would like to have printed on
the check. The range should be the beginning and ending
dates work was performed.
@
Check No.
For manual checks you assign a check number in this field.
If this field is left blank, the check will be automatically
assigned a check number and printed by the Print Checks
routine (which is discussed in a subsequent section). This
field allows a maximum of ten alphanumeric characters.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the check.
@
Dept
This is a display-only field showing the department code
assigned to this employee.
@
EARNINGS
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@
Hrs/U
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@
Current
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@
DEDUCTIONS
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@
Current
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and tax amounts.
@
TAXES
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@rate
Rate
This is a display-only field showing the pay rate or salary
amount assigned to this employee. For hourly employees, the
payment amount will be calculated by multiplying this rate
times the hours worked.
@curear
CUR Earn
This is a display-only field showing the total earnings for
this pay check.
@curded
CUR Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the total deductions
and taxes for this pay check.
@curnet
CUR NET
This is a display-only field showing the total net amount
for this pay check. The net amount is equal to the total
earnings minus the total of the deductions and taxes.
@ytdnet
YTD Earn
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
earnings.
@ytdded
YTD Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
deductions and taxes.
@ytdnet
YTD NET
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date net
amount. The year-to-date net amount is equal to the year-to-
date earnings minus the total of the year-to-date deductions
and year-to-date taxes.
The check screen has a number of special function keys each
of which is described below:
!pychk2
CHECK ENTRY SCREEN
==================
%
CALC
This function key is used to recalculate deductions and
taxes based on the currently displayed check information.
SKIP
This function key enables you to jump the cursor from one
screen section to another.
TIME
This function key brings up the Time Card entry screen. For
this key to be active you must have answered "Y" to multiple
departments in the payroll control file and "Y" to job cost
in the system-wide control file. This screen will enable yo
enter a time, rate, department, and job number for each ear
activity. A detailed description of this screen is provided
end of this section.
EMPL
This function key brings up the employee entry screens for
viewing or making changes.
GEN
This function key may only be used in ADD mode and allows
you to generate a check like the Generate Checks menu
selection. The difference is that this check generation
routine only generates one check at a time. When you press
this function key a popup will appear asking you for
information similarly to the Generated Checks menu choice.
You should enter the information on the popup and then press
the SAVE function key to generate the check. To exit the
popup without generating a check, you should press the
ESCAPE key.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save information on the check screen.
For those using time card entry, the following screen will
appear upon pressing the TIME function key.
%
Rate
You will enter a rate if the earning code has a rate factor
assigned to it and the employee has a pay type of "U" or
unit pay. Otherwise enter a payment amount. If you enter a
payment amount, this amount will be displayed under the
column Total located to the right of this field.
Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for unit pay).
The system will automatically calculate the pay amount based
on the employee's pay rate. The calculated pay amount will
be displayed under the column Total located to the right of
this field.
Total
This is a display-only field showing the payment amount for
the earning line.
act/help/pychk.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000053410 05165726403 014144 0 ustar infoflex users !pychk
CHECK ENTRY SCREEN
==================
This section describes the process of editing generated
checks or entering manual checks into your Payroll program.
Time cards may also be entered via this menu choice.
@empno
Employee Code
The employee code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the employee table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
This is a display-only field showing the pay group code
assigned to this employee.
@deductperiod
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period there will be
no automatic deductions taken on checks.
@paybegin
Beginning Pay Date
Enter the beginning date of the pay date range you would
like to have printed on the check. The range should be the
beginning and ending dates work was performed.
@payend
Ending Pay Date
Enter the ending date of the pay date range you would like
to have printed on the check. The range should be the
beginning and ending dates work was performed.
@chkno
Check No.
For manual checks you assign a check number in this field.
If this field is left blank, the check will be automatically
assigned a check number and printed by the Print Checks
routine. This field allows a maximum of ten alphanumeric
characters.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the check.
@dpt
Dept
This is a display-only field showing the department code
assigned to this employee.
@edesc1
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs1
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt1
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc1
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt1
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc1
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt1
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc2
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs2
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt2
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc2
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt2
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc2
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt2
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc3
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs3
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt3
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc3
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt3
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc3
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt3
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc4
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs4
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt4
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc4
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt4
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc4
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt4
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc5
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs5
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt5
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc5
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt5
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc5
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt5
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc6
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs6
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt6
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc6
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt6
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc6
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt6
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc7
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs7
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt7
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc7
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt7
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc7
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt7
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc8
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs8
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt8
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc8
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt8
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc8
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt8
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@edesc9
Earnings Code
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
@ehrs9
Hours or Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ecamt9
Current Earning Amount
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
@ddesc9
Deduction Code
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
@dcamt9
Deduction Amount
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and amounts.
@tdesc9
Tax Code
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
@tcamt9
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
@rate
Rate
This is a display-only field showing the pay rate or salary
amount assigned to this employee. For hourly employees, the
payment amount will be calculated by multiplying this rate
times the hours worked.
@curearn
CUR Earn
This is a display-only field showing the total earnings for
this pay check.
@curded
CUR Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the total deductions
and taxes for this pay check.
@curnet
CUR NET
This is a display-only field showing the total net amount
for this pay check. The net amount is equal to the total
earnings minus the total of the deductions and taxes.
@ytdearn
YTD Earn
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
earnings.
@ytdded
YTD Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
deductions and taxes.
@ytdnet
YTD NET
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date net
amount. The year-to-date net amount is equal to the year-to-
date earnings minus the total of the year-to-date deductions
and year-to-date taxes.
!
The check screen has a number of special function keys each
of which is described below:
CALC
This function key is used to recalculate deductions and
taxes based on the currently displayed check information.
SKIP
This function key enables you to jump the cursor from one
screen section to another.
TIME
This function key brings up the Time Card entry screen. For
this key to be active you must have answered "Y" to multiple
departments in the payroll control file and "Y" to job cost
in the system-wide control file. This screen will enable yo
enter a time, rate, department, and job number for each ear
activity. A detailed description of this screen is provided
end of this section.
EMPL
This function key brings up the employee entry screens for
viewing or making changes.
GEN
This function key may only be used in ADD mode and allows
you to generate a check like the Generate Checks menu
selection. The difference is that this check generation
routine only generates one check at a time. When you press
this function key a popup will appear asking you for
information similarly to the Generated Checks menu choice.
You should enter the information on the popup and then press
the SAVE function key to generate the check. To exit the
popup without generating a check, you should press the
ESCAPE key.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save information on the check screen.
For those using time card entry, the following screen will
appear upon pressing the TIME function key.
!pyearn
@paycode
Earning Code
Enter the earning code. This code must exist in the earning
code table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@dpt
Dept
Enter the department number. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries. This prompt
will only appear if you selected multiple departments on the
payroll control file.
@jobdate
Job Date
This is the date for which the work was performed.
@jobno
Job
Enter the job number.
@payrate
Rate
You will enter a rate if the earning code has a rate factor
assigned to it and the employee has a pay type of "U" or
unit pay. Otherwise enter a payment amount. If you enter a
payment amount, this amount will be displayed under the
column Total located to the right of this field.
@units
Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for unit pay).
The system will automatically calculate the pay amount based
on the employee's pay rate. The calculated pay amount will
be displayed under the column Total located to the right of
this field.
@payamount
Total
This is a display-only field showing the payment amount for
the earning line.
!genselect
GEN
This function key may only be used in ADD mode and allows
you to generate a check like the Generate Checks menu
selection. The difference is that this check generation
routine only generates one check at a time. When you press
this function key a popup will appear asking you for
information similarly to the Generated Checks menu choice.
You should enter the information on the popup and then press
the SAVE function key to generate the check. To exit the
popup without generating a check, you should press the
ESCAPE key.
@empno
Employee Code
The employee code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the employee table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
This is a display-only field showing the pay group code
assigned to this employee.
@deductperiod
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period there will be
no automatic deductions taken on checks.
@paybegin
Beginning Pay Date
Enter the beginning date of the pay date range you would
like to have printed on the check. The range should be the
beginning and ending dates work was performed.
@payend
Ending Pay Date
Enter the ending date of the pay date range you would like
to have printed on the check. The range should be the
beginning and ending dates work was performed.
@chkno
Check No.
For manual checks you assign a check number in this field.
If this field is left blank, the check will be automatically
assigned a check number and printed by the Print Checks
routine. This field allows a maximum of ten alphanumeric
characters.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the check.
act/help/pypchkr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001746 05165726406 014577 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
act/help/slctl.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005030 05165726411 014141 0 ustar infoflex users !slctl
SALES ORDER CONTROL FILE
========================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Sales Order
menu.
@rec
Quote Number Prefix
Enter Quote Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the quote number. The starting number for quotes is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter quote numbers
manually.
@recinvoice
Starting Quotes Invoce Number
The starting number for quotes is entered in this field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter quote numbers
manually.
@ord
Order Number Prefix
Enter Order Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the order number. The starting number for orders is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers
manually.
@order
Order Number
The starting number for orders is entered in this. You may
enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers manually.
@inv
Invoice Number Prefix
Enter Invoice Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the invoice number. The starting number for invoices is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@invoice
Starting Invoice Number
The starting number for invoices is entered in this field.
You may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@p
G/L Posting Method
Send (T)ransactions or (S)ummary of transactions to G/L when
posting
Enter "T" if you would like to have each transaction posted
to the General Ledger or "S" if you would like only summary
totals posted to the General Ledger. You only need to answer
this prompt if you are using the General Ledger. By posting
each transaction (option "T"), you will be able to see every
transaction responsible for period totals while in the
General Ledger. The downside of posting individual
transactions to the General Ledger is that the pos process
will be slower and significantly more disk space will be u
up.
@days
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
act/help/apchk.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021170 05165726361 014115 0 ustar infoflex users !apchk
PAYMENT ENTRY SCREEN
====================
Payments are entered in groups or batches; each batch
consisting of one or more payments. Each payment may be
applied to specific invoices and/or G/L Accounts. To enter a
payment batch select option 9 on the Accounts Payable menu.
The A/P payments batch entry screen will appear as shown
below.
@module
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the payment.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of adjustments for both editing
and auditing purposes. To return to an existing batch, press
the CHG function key then press the NEXT function key until
the correct batch is displayed.
@entdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date defaults to the system date. This date
represents the fiscal period to which this batch will be
posted.
@glcode
G/L Account
This field is the General Ledger account number to which the
payments will be debited (usually a bank).
@chktotamount
Deposit Total
The total field will display the total amount of all
payments within the batch.
@venno
Vendor Code
The vendor code is a required entry field. The maximum entry
is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in the
vendor table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@chkctl
Bank Control Number
This is not a required entry field and can be used to store
the bank control number or ABA number. This field allows a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
@chkno
Check Number
This is not a required entry field and can be used to store
the check number. This field allows a maximum of 10
alphanumeric characters.
@trandate
Date
Enter the Date of the Payment. This date will be used to
calculate aging.
@chkamount
Amount
Enter the Payment Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits.
@unapplied
This is not an entry field, but will display the amount of
funds you have NOT applied to Invoices.
!ardist
Enter Payments
@glcode
G/L Account
This field is the General Ledger account number to which the
payments will be applied.
@amount
Amount
Enter the Payment Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits. While on this screen you may apply the
Payment Amount across any number of G/L Accounts. A positive
value will debit the G/L Account and a negative value will
credit it.
!apreverse
While on the Payment entry of the screen you may Reverse
previously posted payments or enter payments manually line
by line.
If you elected to retain a Payment Register in the Control
File, you will be able to REVERSE previously posted Payments
that have NOT been purged. Reversing Payments is done by
pressing the REV function key while on the Customer Payment
screen. Upon pressing this function key the popup screen for
Reversing Payments will appear as follows:
After entering the appropriate information on this screen,
you will press the SAVE function key to Reverse the selected
Payments.
@venno
Vendor Code
The vendor code is a required entry field. The maximum entry
is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in the
vendor table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@chkno
Check Number
This is a required entry field and can be used to store
the check number. This field allows a maximum of 10
alphanumeric characters. This check number must also be in
the payment register.
@trandate
Date
Enter the Date of the Payment.
@amount
Amount
Enter the Payment Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits.
!apchkgl
With the manual method of entering Payments, you will enter
them line by line. The manual method is also how you will
edit the results from your automatic selections. When using
the manual method of entering Payments, you may apply
Payment amounts to invoices and/or any G/L Accounts. To
apply a Payment amount to G/L Accounts you will press the
G/L function key and the following screen will appear.
As you enter Payments manually, you will encounter
additional entry screens for those customers who are Open
Item (customers where payments are applied to specific
Invoices). The rest of this section on Payment Entry deals
with the additional screens encountered for Open Item
customers. If all of your customers are Balance Forwa need
not read any further.
The additional screens for Open Item customers enable you to
easily apply payments to specific invoices. The first of
these screens is the Invoice Payment screen. The Invoice
Payment screen will appear automatically whenever you enter
an amount for an Open Item customer. You may also gain
access to the Invoice Payment screen by pressing the ZOOM
function key while positioned on an Open Item customer's
follows.
!artselect
While on the Invoice Payment screen you may select a group
of invoices to pay, by pressing the SEL function key. Upon
pressing the SEL function key the following selection screen
will popup in the middle of the Invoice Payment screen:
@div
Division
Enter the division Number.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning invoice number of a range you wish to
pay. If no range is entered, all invoices with a non zero
amount will be selected.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending invoice number of a range you wish to
select.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning date of invoices you wish to select.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the last date of inoices you wish to select.
@discdate
Discount Date Cutoff
Enter the date of discount for the invoice you wish to
select.
@duedate
Due Date
Enter the latest due date for invoices to select.
@autopay
Autopay
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically pay the
invoices selected.
@autodisc
Automatic Discount
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically take the
discount for invoices selected and paid.
!apdelete
The Deletion screen allows you to enter a range of invoices
to remove from the list of invoices to pay. If you do not
enter an invoice range all invoices will be deleted. After
entering the appropriate information on this screen, you
will press the SAVE function key to start the deletion
process.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning invoice number of a range you wish to
pay. If no range is entered, all invoices with a non zero
amount will be selected.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending invoice number of a range you wish to
select.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning date of invoices you wish to select.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the last date of inoices you wish to select.
!appay
INVOICE PAYMENT SCREEN
======================
The Invoice Payment Screen will appear automatically
whenever you enter an amount for an Open Item customer. You
may also gain access to this screen by pressing ZOOM while
positioned on an Open Item custmor's Payment line.
@invno
Invoice Number
This is the invoice number being considered for payment.
@discamt
Discount Amount
This is the amount of the discount to be taken on payment of
this invoice.
@payamt
Amount Paid
Enter here the amount to pay against this invoice.
!apmselect
While on the Invoice Payment screen you may select a group
of invoices to pay, by pressing the SEL function key. Upon
pressing the SEL function key the following selection screen
will popup in the middle of the Invoice Payment screen:
@div
Division
Enter the division Number.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning date of invoices you wish to select.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the last date of inoices you wish to select.
@discdate
Discount Date Cutoff
Enter the date of discount for the invoice you wish to
select.
@duedate
Due Date
Enter the latest due date for invoices to select.
@autopay
Autopay
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically pay the
invoices selected.
@autodisc
Automatic Discount
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically take the
discount for invoices selected and paid.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the range of vendor codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a vendor range the computer will print
all vendor.
act/help/glcoa.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001132 05165726371 014111 0 ustar infoflex users !glcoa
ACCOUNT ENTRY
=============
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the account number so that it is consistent with the
account code format specified in the System-Wide Control
File. You can use up to 12 characters including the
delimiters.
@desc
Account Description
Enter the account description as you would like it to appear
on your financial statements. You can use up to 30
characters.
@t
Account Type
Enter the account type and subtype.
@d
Debit/Credit
Enter the debit/credit field. Valid entries are "D" for
debit or "C" for Credit.
act/help/sldiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003622 05165726412 014147 0 ustar infoflex users !sldiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
%
%
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the name for the division. You can use up to 20
characters.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@city
Division City
Enter the city for the division.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/sljrnr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004131 05165726413 014335 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES JOURNAL REPORT BY INVOICE, INVOICE
=========================================
This menu option is for sales journal report by invoice
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the begining sales invoices number you want to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending sales order invoices you want to print.
@invdate1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@invdate2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/apopenr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005314 05165726362 014557 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P INVOICE JOURNAL
===================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter report destination. Four options are available.
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the
screen. Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be
routed to the default printer. To route output to
alternative printers you would enter the printer's device
name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter number of report copies you want. One to ten copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
a title page should be printed for the report. A report
title page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen
with the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor code.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor code.
@batch
Batch Code
Enter batch code.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Checks?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include checks.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@s
Source
This is the source of this tranasction.
@m
Module
This identifies the module that generated this transaction.
act/help/apopenr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005326 05165726362 014563 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P DISTRIBUTION JOURNAL
========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter report destination. Four options are available.
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the
screen. Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be
routed to the default printer. To route output to
alternative printers you would enter the printer's device
name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter number of report copies you want. One to ten copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
a title page should be printed for the report. A report
title page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen
with the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor code.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor code.
@batch
Batch Code
Enter batch code.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Checks?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include checks.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@s
Source
This is the source of this tranasction.
@m
Module
This identifies the module that generated this transaction.
act/help/apopenr3.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005312 05165726363 014560 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P VENDOR JOURNAL
==================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter report destination. Four options are available.
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the
screen. Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be
routed to the default printer. To route output to
alternative printers you would enter the printer's device
name after the "P". The auxiliary port is a port leading
out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter number of report copies you want. One to ten copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
a title page should be printed for the report. A report
title page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen
with the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor code.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor code.
@batch
Batch Code
Enter batch code.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Checks?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include checks.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@s
Source
This is the source of this tranasction.
@m
Module
This identifies the module that generated this transaction.
act/help/jcmtlr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003666 05165726400 014407 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
JOB COST MATERIAL BATCH LISTING
===============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invenno1
Beginning Inventory Item Number
Enter the first of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print. If you do not enter an item numbers
range the computer will print all inventory items. You may
press the HELP function key to view the list of valid items
numbers.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Item Number
Enter the last of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print.
act/help/bkgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000000 05165726370 014102 0 ustar infoflex users act/help/apdivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001323 05165726362 014313 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@divname
Enter division names.
@div
Division Name
Enter division name.
act/help/slbckrdr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005173 05165726407 014643 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY REQUIRE DATE
==================================
This menu option is for backorder report require date
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/inprc2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001166 05165726374 014233 0 ustar infoflex users !inprc
INVENTORY PRICE CODE ENTRY
==========================
@pr1
Customer Price
This is the customer price code type.
@description
Description
Enter a description for the price code entry.
@pr2
Inventory Price Code
This is the Inventory Item Price Code.
@desc2
Inventory Code Description
This is the Inventory Price Code description.
@type
Cost/Price Type
This is the Cost/Price type to indicate either costing or
price basis.
@markup
Percent Markup
Enter the percent markup expected on this item.
@qtybrk
Quantity Break
Enter the quantity required to acheive this pricing code.
act/help/pyglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003041 05165726406 014242 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL HISTORY REPORT (Summary)
================================
This menu option (7) is for printing the G/L distributions
for the check posting. For this option to work, the
system-wide control file parameter for General Ledger must
be set to "Y".
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/pychkpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003645 05641621451 014570 0 ustar infoflex users !select
CHECK JOURNAL.
==============
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
The post number field is for viewing only.
@chkno1
Check Number Range
Enter the range of check numbers you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check number range, the program will
print all checks.
@chkno2
Check Number Range
Enter the last check numbers you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check number range, the program will
print all checks.
@trandat1
Check Date Range
Enter the range of check dates you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check date range, the program will print
all checks.
@trandat2
Check Date Range
Enter the range of check dates you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check date range, the program will print
all checks.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the code of the employee you would like to print.
If you do not enter a employee code, the program will print
all checks.
act/help/pypurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000367 05165726406 014527 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@holdate
Last purge date
This is an non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@hpurdate
New purge date
Enter the New Purge Date. All sales invoices posted prior to
this date will be purged.
act/help/pypto.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000013007 10366663320 014174 0 ustar infoflex users !pypto
We have implemented a dramatically new method for controlling
time off accruals. Some benefits include automatic
carryover, annual accruals, multiple tenure rates, and maximum limits.
The old method will continue to work but will be phased out
in a future version.
You may still access the old method values by pressing the F14 key
while on employee screen #2.
The new method requires assigning Policy Time Off codes (PTO)
on employee screen #2.
The PTO code points to an entry in the
PTO table where the policy time off parameters are defined.
Before assigning PTO codes to an employee, you will need to first
define them in the PTO table.
To define PTOs, select payroll menu option 42.
The PTO table appears as follows.
________________________________________________________________________________
|ACCOUNTFLEX CHANGE MODE Policy Time Off (PTO) DATE: |
|______________________________________________________________________________|
| PTO Code: VLM |
| Description: Vacation |
| Cycle Date: E |
| Reference Date: H |
| Automatic Carryover: Y |
| Rate Units: D |
| Rate Frequency: A |
| |
| Tenure Accrual Max Max Max |
| Months Rate C/O Accrual Avail |
| _________._______.______________.__________.__________.___________ |
| | Level 1| 0 | 5.000000 | 0.00 | | | |
| | Level 2| 60 | 10.000000 | 0.00 | | | |
| | Level 3| 120 | 15.000000 | 0.00 | | | |
| | Level 4| | | | | | |
| | Level 5| | | | | | |
| _________._______.______________.__________.__________.___________ |
________________________________________________________________________________
Below is a description of each field.
PTO code:
This is the unique code identifying this policy time off (PTO).
Cycle Date:
The automatic carryover and annual accrual
will occurr on each anniversary of this cycle date.
The cycle date options are H=Hire, E=Effective, or C=Calender.
Annual accrual is active if the Frequency field as described
below is set to 'A'. Automatic carryover is active if
Automatic Carryover field as described below is set to 'Y'.
The system automatically keeps track of the
Next Anniversary Cycle Date (NACD) on employee screen #2.
When a check is posted with a Reference Date (as described below)
exceeding the NACD, then the automatic carryover (if active)
and/or annual accrual (if active) take place and the
NACD is advanced one year.
For example, if the cycle date is 03/05/98
and the first check's reference date is 08/20/05 then the NACD
is set to 03/05/06.
Later, when a check is posted that exceeds 03/05/06,
the automatic carryover and/or annual accrual take place
and the NACD is advanced one year to 03/05/07.
The first check initializes the NACD so there are no
automatic carryovers or annual accruals until the
employee's first anniversary.
Although the system maintains the NACD, the user may
edit this field if necessary. It may be necessary
to manually update the NACD if the cycle date changes.
The time off accrual report will provide an overview of
all parameters regarding vacation, sick, and personal time off.
This report is obtained by selecting Payroll menu option #15 then
option #3.
Reference Date:
The annual accrual and automatic carryover
will occur when this date exceeds the anniversary of the cycle date.
The options are C=Check, B=Check Begin, or E=Check End.
Automatic Carryover:
Enter 'Y' to automatically assign unused time off to carryover
and zero out both accrued and used.
This automatic carryover occurs when the
Reference Date (as described above) exceeds the
cycle date's anniversary (as described above).
Rate Units:
This is the unit used for all accrual rates.
The options are U=Units or D=Days.
Rate Frequency:
This is the accrual frequency. The options are
U=per Unit worked, P=per Pay Period, or A=per year.
The 'A' option for annual accrual and occurs on
the anniversay of the cycle date as described above.
Tenure Months:
Enter months from cycle date when accrual rate will kick in.
Accrual Rate:
Accrual rate.
Max Carryover:
This is the maximum unused time that will be
carried over on the anniversary date.
If left empty all unused time will be carried over.
Max Accrual:
This is the maximum time off that may be accrued.
This field is only active when assigned a value.
Max Avail:
This is the maximum time off that may be available.
This field is only active when assigned a value.
act/help/pygenp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004345 05165726406 014336 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL CHECKS FOR EMPLOYEE GROUPS
==================================
This section describes how to generate checks. Generating
checks will create a batch of checks based on the
information you provided for each employee. Once generated,
you will be given an opportunity to override information on
the checks prior to printing.
When the checks have been generated you will see the
following message:
Check generation has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Payroll menu.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code you would like to generate checks for.
This is a required field and refers to the pay group code
you assigned to each employee record.
@deductperiod
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period no deductions
will be taken on the checks.
@paybegin
Beginning Pay Date
Enter the beginning pay date you would like to have printed
on the checks. The range should be the beginning and ending
dates that the work was performed.
@payend
Ending Pay Date
Enter the pay date range you would like to have printed on
the checks. The range should be the beginning and ending
dates that the work was performed.
@trandate
Date on Check
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the checks.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter an employee code for whom you would like to generate a
check. If you do not enter an employee code, the program
will generate checks for all employees belonging to the
above pay group code. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list valid employees.
@pass
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. Two passes will take place: pass 1 verifies
the data and pass 2 generates the checks.
@pempno
Employee
The employee number that is currently being processed will
be displayed here.
act/help/porcv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005026 05165726402 014156 0 ustar infoflex users !porcv
PURCHASE ORDER RECEIVING
========================
@invno
Purchase Order #
The purchase order being received is entered in this field.
The HELP function is operational and the Help table displays
all of the open purchase orders.
@recdate
Receive Date
Defaults to the system date. This field can be changed.
@1
Status
Displays the order status "O" if the order is open and "C"
if the order is closed.
@venno
Vendor
The vendor field displays the vendor ID and the vendor name
from the purchase order file. This is a display only field.
@lno
Line
The line field contains the line number from the purchase
@qtydue
Qty Due
This field displays the quantity due from the vendor on this
purchase order.
@qtyreceive
Qty Rec
Enter the quantity received in this field. If the item you
are receiving is serialized, you will be prompted for serial
numbers. This procedure is discussed later in this section.
@trandate
Date Rec
This field defaults to the system date. If the system date
is not acceptable enter any date you wish in this field.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Displays the cost per unit ordered from the purchase order.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
@invnno
Vendor Item
This field displays the vendor part number entered on the
purchase order to this vendor
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field displays the description
from the purchase order.
@qtyor
Ord
The ord field displays the quantity ordered on this purchase
order.
@qtyre
Rec
The Rec Field shows the quantity received to date.
@qtyin
Inv
The Inv field displays the quantity of the line item that
has been invoiced to date.
@costexttot
Totals
The Totals Field contains the sum of the extended costs for
each of the Line Items.
!poserial
SERIAL # ASSIGNMENT
===================
@serialno
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of each received unit.
@jobno
Job Number
Enter the Job Number to which this unit will be assigned;
this field may be left blank if the unit is going to stock.
@
!pojob
JOB DISTRIBUTION
================
This screen is for entering the job assignments for the
products.
@jobno
Job Number
This is a number assigned to a job in progress.
@qtyor
Qty Due
This field displays the Quantity due from the vendor on this
Purchase Order.
@etadate
Due Date
Enter the date this job is due to be completed.
@qtyre
Qty Rec
Enter the quantity received in this field.
act/help/glrec.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002476 06602170236 014122 0 ustar infoflex users !glrec
G/L RECURRING INVOICES
======================
Enter Recurring Transactions
This is for the process of entering recurring transactions
into your General Ledger program.
Recurring transactions are entered individually. Each
transaction may have any number of distributions.
@refcod
Reference Code
The reference code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This field can be used
to identify the transaction in an unique way for audit trail
purposes.
@invno
Reference Number
The reference number allows you to group recurring
transactions. The field holds a maximum of 10 alphanumeric
characters.
@description
Description
The description field allows you to describe the type of
transaction. The field holds a maximum of 40 alphanumeric
characters.
@glcode
Account Code
Enter the account code. This code must exist in the account
code table.
@gldesc
Account Title
The account title will automatically be displayed and is a
non entry field.
@reference
Reference
The account reference is an optional entry field that can be
used for descriptive information. This alphanumeric field
holds a maximum of 10 characters.
@debit
Debit Amount
Enter the debit amount.
@credit
Credit Amount
Enter the credit amount.
act/help/inbom2r.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002774 05165726373 014413 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INVENTORY REPORT
================
This menu option is for usage inventory report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Dates
Enter the begining inventory dates for the valuation
report wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Dates
Enter the ending inventory dates for the valuation report
you wish to print.
act/help/qfdict.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000431 07557536472 014307 0 ustar infoflex users !qftab
@format
Valid formating options are as follows.
Character fields options:
upshift
right
clear
mask(XXX-XXX)
Numeric fields options: (see documentation)
Date fields options: (see documentation)
act/help/pychkp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001635 05165726403 014326 0 ustar infoflex users !select
POST CHECKS
===========
@w
This section describes how to Post your checks to the history file and
General Ledger. It is important that your checks be
correctly entered before posting. This is because once your
data has been posted it can no longer be modified.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin posting or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the Data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Payroll menu.
act/help/poordr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004675 05165726402 014424 0 ustar infoflex users !select
OPEN PURCHASE ORDERS BY PO#
===========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Job distribution detail should be printed on the report.
@rptserial
Report Serials
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Serial Number detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO#
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
Ending PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
Ending PO# Date
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
@s
Status Order
Enter the order status you wish to select for the report.
Entering "O" for open orders, or "C" for closed orders.
@y
Status Items
Enter the item status you wish to select for the report.
Entering "O" for open items, or "C" for closed items.
When you are satisfied with your answers, press the RUN
function key to generate the report.
act/help/pychkw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006701 05165726403 014334 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PAYROLL CHECKS
====================
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter an employee code, the program
will print all checks. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a group code, the program will
print all checks.
@paybegin
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a pay date range, the program
will print all checks.
@payend
Pay Date Range
Enter the ending pay date range for which you would like to
print checks. If you do not enter a pay date range, the
program will print all checks.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the check date for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a check date, the program will
print all checks.
@chknofirst
Print Check Number Range
Enter the check number range that you want to assign to the
printed checks. The program will assign these check numbers
to all checks within the batch that do not already have a
check number assigned to them. You must enter a beginning
range for check numbers to be assigned.
@chknolast
Print Check Number Range
Enter the last check number range that you want to assign to
the printed checks. The program will assign these check
numbers to all checks within the batch that do not already
have a check number assigned to them. You must enter a
beginning range for check numbers to be assigned.
@chknov1
VOID Check Number Range
Enter the check number range that you want to VOID. The
program will VOID these checks numbers and enter the VOID
checks into the Check Register. You will want to use this
option if checks were destroyed due to a paper jam or paper
misalignment.
If some of the checks are damaged, for example checks
282-283 of the check run 275-285, you may VOID and reprint
the damaged checks only or VOID and reprint all checks
starting with 282.
@chknov2
VOID Check Number Range
Enter the last check number range that you want to VOID. The
program will VOID these checks numbers and enter the VOID
checks into the Check Register. You will want to use this
option if checks were destroyed due to a paper jam or paper
misalignment.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
act/help/poordr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005572 05165726402 014422 0 ustar infoflex users !select
OPEN PURCHASE ORDERS BY ITEM, ETA DATE
======================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Job distribution detail should be printed on the report.
@rptserial
Report Serials
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Serial Number detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO#
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
Ending PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
Ending PO# Date
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
@s
Status Order
Enter the order status you wish to select for the report.
Entering "O" for open orders, or "C" for closed orders.
When you are satisfied with your answers, press the RUN
function key to generate the report.
@etadate1
ETA Date Range
Enter the begining dates for the item orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@etadate2
ETA Date Range
Enter the ending dates for the item orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/poordr3.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005036 05165726402 014416 0 ustar infoflex users !select
UNINVOICED RECEIVING ORDERS BY VENDOR ,PO#
==========================================
!select
OPEN PURCHASE ORDERS BY PO#
===========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Job distribution detail should be printed on the report.
@rptserial
Report Serials
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Serial Number detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO#
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
Ending PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
Ending PO# Date
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
@s
Status Order
Enter the order status you wish to select for the report.
Entering "O" for open orders, or "C" for closed orders.
@y
Status Items
Enter the item status you wish to select for the report.
Entering "O" for open items, or "C" for closed items.
When you are satisfied with your answers, press the RUN
function key to generate the report.
act/help/poordr4.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003521 05165726402 014414 0 ustar infoflex users @select
COST HISTORY BY ITEM, ETA DATE
==============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
PO# Range
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@etadate1
ETA Date Range
Enter the begining dates for the item orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@etadate2
ETA Date Range
Enter the ending dates for the item orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Vendor No. Range
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Vendor No. Range
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/pyded.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001352 06642631013 014122 0 ustar infoflex users
!pydeduct
DEDUCTION ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This screen describes how to set up your deductions. It is
important that the deductions table be set up properly prior
to entering pay checks.
@code
Deductions Code
Enter the deduction code to uniquely identify the deduction.
@description
Description
Enter the description of the deduction.
@glcode
G/L Account
Enter the G/L liability account for this deduction.
@q
Non Qualified?
Enter "Y" if this is a nonqualified plan that should be
reported in box 16 of employees' W-2 forms, otherwise enter
"N".
@d
Defer Comp?
Enter "Y" if this is deferred compensation that should be
reported in box 17 of employees' W-2 forms, otherwise enter
"N".
act/help/podiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004164 05165726400 014146 0 ustar infoflex users !podiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
The Division entry screen consists of both a SINGLE-RECORD
and MULTI-RECORD portion. The SINGLE-RECORD portion prompts
for the division name and address. The MULTI-RECORD portion
prompts for the G/L account codes for that division.
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the name for the division. You can use up to 20
characters.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@city
Division City
Enter the city for the division.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/inprcc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001213 05165726374 014305 0 ustar infoflex users !inprcc
CUSTOMER PRICE CODE ENTRY
=========================
@prc
Price
This is the price code used to classify types of entry.
@description
Description
Enter a description for the price code entry.
!inzoom
@pr2
Inventory Price Code
This is the Inventory Item Price Code.
@desc2
Inventory Code Description
This is the Inventory Price Code description.
@type
Cost/Price Type
This is the Cost/Price type to indicate either costing or
price basis.
@markup
Percent Markup
Enter the percent markup expected on this item.
@qtybrk
Quantity Break
Enter the quantity required to acheive this pricing code.
act/help/archkr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005041 05165726365 014365 0 ustar infoflex users !select
RECEIPT BATCH LISTING
=====================
This section discusses how to print your receipt batches so
that errors can be discovered and corrected prior to
posting. Posting will be discussed in the next section.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@m
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
S=Sales).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@glcode
G/L Account Code
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all General Ledger accounts.
@chkdate1
Beginning Receipt Date
Enter the beginning range of receipt dates you would like to
print.
@chkdate2
Ending Receipt Date
Enter the ending range of Receipt Dates you would like to
print. If you do not enter a date range the computer will
print all Receipts.
@chkno1
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chkno2
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the computer
will print everything.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all the customers.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all the customers.
act/help/inprci.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001211 05165726374 014311 0 ustar infoflex users !inprci
INVENTORY PRICE CODE ENTRY
==========================
@prc
Price
This is the price code used to classify types of entry.
@description
Description
Enter a description for the price code entry.
!inzoom
@pr2
Customer Price Code
This is the Customer Item Price Code.
@desc2
Customer Code Description
This is the Customer Price Code description.
@type
Cost/Price Type
This is the Cost/Price type to indicate either costing or
price basis.
@markup
Percent Markup
Enter the percent markup expected on this item.
@qtybrk
Quantity Break
Enter the quantity required to acheive this pricing code.
act/help/inadjp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000711 05165726373 014275 0 ustar infoflex users !select
inadjp
@pass
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
@pbatch
Source and Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
@pinvenno
Inventory Number
The inventory number being processed is displayed here.
act/help/py941.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001407 05165726402 013712 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT FEDERAL FORM 941
======================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@qtr
Quarter
Enter the payroll quarter for the report.
@year
Year
Enter the payroll year for the report.
act/help/inuserg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006043 05165726375 014512 0 ustar infoflex users !select
USAGE REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM,ORDER DATE
======================================
This menu option is for usage booking report by group
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@shpdate1
Begining Ship Date
Enter the begining ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@shpdate2
Ending Ship Date
Enter the ending ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
act/help/inuseri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006027 05165726375 014516 0 ustar infoflex users !select
USAGE REPORT BY ITEM,ORDER DATE
================================
This menu option is for usage booking report by item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@shpdate1
Begining Ship Date
Enter the begining ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@shpdate2
Ending Ship Date
Enter the ending ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
act/help/apglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002532 05165726362 014217 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P INVOICE G/L JOURNAL
=======================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/glcoab.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001210 05165726371 014250 0 ustar infoflex users !glcoab
ACCOUNT BUDGETS
==============
@glcode
Account Number
Enter the account number using the same format as defined in
the account code format specified in the System-wide control
file. You can enter up to 12 characters including the
delimiter.
@d/c
The debit/credit field is for viewing.
@yr
Year
Enter the Year. Your entry can only be 2 characters in
length and must be numeric.
@pr
Period
Enter the Period. Your entry can only be 2 characters in
length and must be numeric.
@budget
Budget Amount
Enter the Budget. Your entry can only be 13 characters in
length and must be numeric.
act/help/inuserw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006060 05165726376 014532 0 ustar infoflex users !select
USAGE REPORT BY WAREHOUSE, ITEM,ORDER DATE
==========================================
This menu option is for usage booking report by warehouse
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@shpdate1
Begining Ship Date
Enter the begining ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@shpdate2
Ending Ship Date
Enter the ending ship date for the usage report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
act/help/arcusr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001704 05165726366 014416 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT CUSTOMER BY NAME
======================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
act/help/glcoai.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006711 05165726371 014272 0 ustar infoflex users !glcoai
Account Inquiry
This screen allows account inquiries. With this screen, you
can view account balances by period, and the detail
comprising each balance. None of the data can be changed on
the inquiry screen.
To view the transaction detail for any period position the
cursor on the period line that you would like to see more
detail and press the ZOOM key to ZOOM in on that record. The
transaction detail screen will appear as follows.
@glcode
Account
Enter the account number using the same format as defined in
the account code format section specified in the System-wide
control file. You can enter up to 12 characters including
the delimeter.
Press the SAVE function key after entering the account
number and the cursor will jump to the detail portion of the
screen.
@yr
Year
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value representing a calendar year.
@pr
Period
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value representing the period of time within a year.
@prevbalance
Previous Balance
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value of the accounts previous balance.
@currbalance
Current Balance
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value of the accounts current balance.
@runbalance
Running Balance
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value of the accounts running balance.
@budget
Budget
This field is a non entry field and displays the numeric
value of the accounts budget.
!gldetail
Press the ESCAPE key to return to the account inquiry screen
from the transaction detail screen. While on the account
inquiry screen you may return to the account number portion
of the screen by pressing the SAVE key or return to the
General Ledger menu by pressing the ESCAPE key.
@glcode
Account
The account number displayed represents the account you are
zooming on.
@module
Module
This is the application that generated the journal activity.
For example R=Receivables and O=Purchase Orders.
@source
Source
The Source of the transaction will be displayed on the
screen. For example R=Receivable and C=Cash.
@batch
Batch
The batch number assigned to the transaction number will be
displayed on the screen. The batch number represents a
number assigned to a data input session consisting of
transactions made up of distributions.
@perdate
Period
The period date will be displayed on the screen. The period
date will default to the system date, but can represent the
date of the period in which the transaction should be
posted.
@trandate
Transaction Date
The transaction date will be displayed on the screen. This
date will default to the system date, but can represent the
date the transaction took place.
@invno
Transaction Number
The transaction number will be displayed on the screen, and
represents the number assigned to a transaction made up of
possibly several distributions.
@refcod
Reference Code
The reference code assigned to the transaction will be
displayed on the screen.
@debit
Debit
The debit balance for the transaction.
@credit
Credit
The credit balance for the transaction.
@description
Description
This is descriptive information supplied with the batch when
it was posted.
@reference
Reference
This is descriptive information supplied with the
transaction when it was entered.
act/help/apchkp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003717 05165726361 014304 0 ustar infoflex users !select
POST CHECK BATCHES
==================
This section describes how to Post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Payable. It is important that
your checks be correctly entered before posting. This is
because once your data has been posted it can no longer be
modified.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin posting or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the Data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the check will be displayed here.
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
Invoice
The invoice number that the check is being posted to will be
displayed here.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Payable menu.
@w
/********************************************************************
P O S T I N G P R O G R A M
------------------------------
This posting program has 3 distinct phases:
1) Phase 1 verifies the batch transactions to be posted.
If errors are detected with any batch transaction records an
error listing is generated and the program
is aborted.
2) Phase 2 posts transactions and marks the transactions as
posted (post date).
- update A/P Open file
- update G/L Transaction file
- update Vendor file
- update Batch files (all levels) with posting date.
- update Report Posting file (for reporting from later)
3) Phase 3 deletes posted transactions.
to return to the
act/help/aprec.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001735 05165726363 014130 0 ustar infoflex users !aprec
A/P RECURRING INVOICES
======================
This section describes the process of Entering Recurring
Invoices into your Accounts Payable program.
Recurring Invoices are entered individually. Each Invoice
may have any number of distributions.
@venno
Vendor Number
The vendor code is a required entry field. The maximum entry
is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in the
vendor table.
@invno
Reference Number
This is not a required entry field. The reference number
allows you to group recurring invoices. The field holds a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The desription allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters.
@glcode
G/L Account Code
Enter the Account Code. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
act/help/apvenr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002164 05165726364 014411 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT VENDORS BY NAME
=====================
This menu option is for usage print vendors by code
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the print vendors by
code you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the print vendors by code
you wish to print.
act/help/apchkr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003452 05165726361 014302 0 ustar infoflex users !select
CHECK BATCH LISTING
===================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@batch1
Enter the beginning range of batch number you would like to
print.
@batch2
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@glcode
Enter bank code.
@chkdate1
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@chkdate2
Enter the ending range of Check Dates you would like to
print. If you do not enter a date range the computer will
print all Checks.
@chkno1
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chkno2
Enter the range of check numbers you would like to print. If
you do not enter a check number range the computer will
print everything.
@venno
Enter vendor name.
act/help/apchkw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003361 05165726362 014307 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT CHECKS
============
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@m
Source
This is a required entry field. The source represents where
the transaction originated (P=Payable and O=Purchase Order).
@batch1
Batch Number
This is a required entry field. Enter the number of the
Batch to print checks for. You may press the HELP function
key to see a list of valid Batches.
@glcode
Bank G/L Account Code
This field displays the Batch's Bank G/L Account code. The
Checks will be written from this bank's checkbook.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning of check number range that you want to
assign to the printed checks.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending of check number range that you want to
assign to the printed checks. The program will assign these
check numbers to all checks within the batch that do not
already have a check number assigned to them. You must enter
a beginning range for check numbers to be assigned.
@chknov1
Beginning VOID Check Number
Enter the beginning of check number range that you want to
VOID.
@chknov2
Ending VOID Check Number
Enter the ending of check number range that you want to
VOID. The program will VOID these checks numbers and enter
the VOID checks into the Check Register.
act/help/glcoar.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002255 05165726371 014302 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L CHART OF ACCOUNTS
=====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter the beginning range of account numbers you would
like to print.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter the ending range of account numbers you would like
to print. If you do not enter an account range the
computer will print all accounts.
act/help/glcoat.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000772 05165726371 014306 0 ustar infoflex users !glcoat
ASSIGN SUBTYPES TO ACCOUNTS
===========================
@s
Account Subtype
Enter subtype you would like to assign to accounts.
@glcode
Enter the account number using the same format as defined in
the account code format specified in the System-wide control
file. You can enter up to 12 characters including the
delimiter.
@desc
Enter description of items.
@d
The debit/credit field is for viewing.
@typname
type description will be displayed here.
act/help/inactrds.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006066 05165726372 014647 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INACTIVE REPORT BY LAST SALE DATE
=================================
This menu option is for inactive report by last sale date
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@sldate1
Beginning Last Sale Date
Enter the begining of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@sldate2
Ending Last Sale Date
Enter the ending of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Number
Enter the begining inventory number for the inactive
report wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Number
Enter the ending inventory number for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venname1
Enter the begining vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@venname2
Enter the ending vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
act/help/glform.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001323 05165726371 014314 0 ustar infoflex users !glform
REPORT FORMULAS
===============
This section discusses how to enter your report formulas.
This screen allows you to add new codes and formulas for
reports while you are in the ADD mode.
Below is a description of each field.
@col
Code
Enter the two character code to represent the header
formula.
@heading1
Heading 1
Enter the report heading for the first line of the heading.
@heading2
Heading 2
Enter the report heading for the second line of the heading.
@formula
Formula
Enter the formula for the code and report heading.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE key
to Save the screen. Press the ESCAPE key to return you to
the General Ledger menu.
act/help/arinv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010667 05165726367 014165 0 ustar infoflex users !arinv
A/R INVOICE BATCH ENTRY
=======================
This section describes the process of entering invoices into
your Accounts Receivable program.
Invoices are entered in groups or batches. Each batch may
consist of one or more invoices; each invoice may have any
number of distributions.
@m
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the transaction: "S-I" stands for Sales
Invoice, and "R-I" stands for Accounts Receivable Invoice.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of invoices for both editing and
auditing purposes. To return to an existing batch, press the
CHG function key then press the NEXT function key until the
correct batch is displayed.
@batdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@batchtotal
The total field will display the total amount of all
invoices within the batch.
!ardist
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save the batch screen. The invoice and
screen.
@invno
Invoice
The invoice number may or may not be automatically assigned.
It will be automatically assigned if the value of the
starting invoice number in the control file is non-zero. The
invoice number represents a number assigned to an invoice
made up of possibly several distributions. The invoice field
can accept a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
@cusno
Customer Code
The customer code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the customer table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The invoice date will default to the system date. The
commenced.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date The
period date represents the period that the invoice should be
posted.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@poordno
PO#
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@discdate
Discount Date
This is not a required entry field. If the invoice is paid
by the discount date the discount allowed will be deducted
from the amount due.
@discallow
Discount Allowed
This is not a required entry field. The discount is the
amount that should be deducted from the invoice if paid by
the discount date. The field allows a 9-character numeric
entry.
@duedate
Due Date
This is not a required entry field. The due date represents
the date that the invoice must be paid before it becomes
past due.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The description allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 characters.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the Invoice screen. The cursor will
then jump to the distribution screen where the distributions
relating to the invoice should be entered.
Below is a description of each field.
Distribution Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
@glcode
Account #
Enter the Account Code. You can use up to 12 characters
including the delimeter. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@gldesc
Account Title
The account title will automatically be displayed and is a
non entry field.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
A positive value will credit the G/L Account and a negative
value will debit it.
@totamount
Total
The Total field will display the total amount of all
Distributions within this Invoice.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the distribution screen. The cursor
will then jump back to the invoice screen to enter another
invoice. If there are no more invoices to be entered, you
may return to the batch screen by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Pressing the ESCAPE key while on the batch screen will ret
to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/inphy.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010565 05165726374 014170 0 ustar infoflex users !inphy
INVENTORY PHYSICAL SCREEN
=========================
@s
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
source of the transaction: "I-P" stands for inventory
Physical Count.
@batch
Batch
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to uniquely identify a group of physical count
entries for both editing and auditing purposes. To return to
an existing batch, press the CHG function key then press the
NEXT function key until the correct batch is displayed.
@entdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date. The
period date represents the period that the receipt should be
posted.
@lno
Line
The Line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented for each physical count line.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System-wide control file.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified in the warehouse file. This field will only appear
if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@invenno
Item
The item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being counted is entered. The HELP function
displays the contents of the inventory master file.
@qtyoh
Qty Onhand
This field will display the quantity on-hand for the item.
@qty
Qty
Enter the physical count quantity here.
@unit
Unit
The Unit field displays the unit value from the inventory
master.
@qty_adj
Variance
The difference of quantity on hand and physical count is
displayed in this field.
@description
Remarks
Enter any explanatory comments here to justify the entry.
!inserial
SERIAL # ASSIGNMENT
===================
@serialno
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of each unit affected by this
adjustment.
!inselect
PHYSICAL COUNT WORKSHEET
========================
This menu option is for usage physical count worksheet.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@qtyflag
Print Quantities?
Enter "N" if you do not wish the quantity on hand to show on
the counting sheet. The default is "Y".
@serialflag
Print Serialized Items
Enter "Y" if you wish to include the item numbers for
serialized items on the counting sheet. The default is "N"
which excludes those items from the counting sheets.
@selsort
Sort Order
Enter sort order desired; valid values are G, C, or L, for
group, categor, or location respectively.
@autoqty
Count = QOH
If you wish the physical count to be equal to the Quantiy
on hand, change this to "Y"; otherwise the count amount is
left blank and will need to be filled in.
act/help/ardivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001654 05165726366 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
This menu option is for usage division report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@div
Division Name
Enter division name.
act/help/pydiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007027 05513347215 014161 0 ustar infoflex users !pydiv
DEPARTMENT ENTRY SCREEN
=======================
@div
Department Code
Enter the Department Code.
@name
Name
Enter the name for the department. You can use up to 20
characters.
@description
Description
This is the G/L Account Description.
@glcode
Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file. Note that the payroll accrual account code is
only necessary if you are using the accrual method of
posting to the G/L. For further information lookup accrual
in the index.
@dptsubno
Sub Department
This is an optional entry and need only be entered if
you wish to specify different G/L code assignments by
Sub Department.
The process by which the posting program searches this
table in order to assign a G/L account code is as follows.
When checks are posted to the General Ledger, the posting
program will first try to locate the row with the check's
payment code (see below for payment code description)
and employee's Sub Department.
If this search fails the posting program searches for the
row having the check's payment code and no Sub Department
assigned. If this search fails the posting program
halts and informs you to update the Department table
before posting.
@codetype
Code Type
This is the Payment Code Type. The valid payment codes are:
E=Earning,D=Deduction,T=Employee Tax,O=Other.
@ecod
Code
The payment code entered here will be one of the
codes you previously set up in your Earning Table.
@dcod
Code
The payment code entered here will be one of the
codes you previously set up in your Deduction Table.
@tcod
Code
The payment code entered here will be one of the
codes you previously set up in your Tax Table.
@ocod
Code
The payment code entered can be one of the
the follwing codes:
B = Bank
CG = Cost of Goods Sold
WIPL = Jobs-in-progress labor
@description
Description
This is the G/L Account Description.
@glcode_db
Debit G/L
Enter the G/L Account Code that is to be debited
upon posting checks. If Debiting is not applicable
for the payment code then leave this field blank.
Debit account codes are required for payment
code types of 'E', 'T' when the payment code is
an employer tax, and 'O' when the payment code is
"WIPL" for Jobs-in-progress or "CG' for Cost
of Goods Sold. The account code entered MUST exist
in the G/L Account file.
@glcode_cr
Credit G/L
Enter the G/L Account Code that is to be credited
upon posting checks. Credit account codes are
required for payment code types of 'D',
'T' when the payment code is an employee tax,
and 'O' when the payment code is "B" for Bank.
If Crediting is not applicable for the payment code
then leave this field blank.
The account code entered MUST exist in the
G/L Account file.
.in -1
@glcode_ac
Accrual G/L
If you selected the Accural Method on the Payroll
control file this field will appear.
Enter the G/L Account Code that is to be used
for accrual purposes. Accrual account codes are
required for payment code types of 'E' and 'D'.
The account code entered MUST exist in the
G/L Account file. Note that the payroll accrual
account code is only necessary if you are using
the accrual method of posting to the G/L.
For further information lookup accrual in the index.
act/help/pyhisr10.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004362 05165726406 014512 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary
Enter a "S" will output the report display on the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P" .The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@chkno1
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning check number of the range that you want
to print. If you do not enter a check number range, the
program will print all checks by default. You may press the
HELP function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chkno2
Ending Check Number
Enter the last check number of the range that you want to
print. If you you do not enter a check number range, the
program will print all checks by default.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning check date of the range that you want to
print. All checks will print that have a Check date within
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range, the
program will print all checks by default.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the last check date of the range that you want to
print. All checks will print that have a check date between
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range, the
program will print all checks by default.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code that you want to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print all
checks by default. This code must exist in the employee
table. You may press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
act/help/incat.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000331 05165726373 014124 0 ustar infoflex users !incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
act/help/slbckrc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021067 05165726407 014460 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY CUSTOMER,ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
================================================
This menu option is for backorder report by customer,require
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/apdiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003507 05165726362 014137 0 ustar infoflex users !apdiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the vendor name to identify the vendor in the
system.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@city
Division City
Enter the vendor city for payments.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/podivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001647 05165726400 014333 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
This menu option is for division report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@div
Division Name
Enter division name.
act/help/slbckrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021060 05165726407 014455 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY GROUP,ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
=============================================
This menu option is for backorder report by group,require
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/apveni.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004122 05165726363 014311 0 ustar infoflex users !apveni
VENDOR INQUIRY SCREEN
=====================
This section describes the vendor inquiry screen. With this
screen, you can view vendor invoices and balances. You will
not be allowed to make changes while on this screen.
When the screen appears, enter the vendor you would like to
view. The information about that vendor will immediately
appear. While on this screen you can display the vendor's
Aging amounts by pressing the function key labeled AGE. The
Aging Screen will popup as follows.
To view the list of invoices with balances due for this
vendor, press the SAVE function key. The invoices will be
displayed in the MULTI- RECORD portion of the screen. While
on the Invoice portion of the screen you may press the ZOOM
key to display detail information about any invoice that the
cursor is positioned on. The Invoice Detail screen will
appear as follows.
@venno
Vendor Code
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the
system.
@name
Vendor Name
This is the vendors name.
@contact
Contact Person
This is the contact person for this vendor.
@phone
Tel:
The telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@tc
Terms Code
Enter the Terms Code for that vendor.
@cred
Credit Code
Enter the credit code of the vendor.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
Enter the credit limit for the vendor.
@invno
Invoice Number
The invoice number for this item.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The Invoice Date.
@description
Description
Description of the invoice, if any given.
@amountdue
Amount Due
The balance still owed on the invoice.
!apopen
OPEN ITEMS DISPLAY
==================
@atrandat
Transaction Date
The Transaction date for this open invoice.
@M
Module
The module which generated this invoice.
@S
Source
The source of this invoice.
@BATCH
Batch
This is the batch number from which this invoice was posted.
@adescription
Description
This is the description of this invoice.
@adiscount
Discount
This is the amount of discount available for this invoice.
@aamount
Amount
This is the balance due on this invoice.
act/help/slbckri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021044 05165726410 014453 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
========================================
This menu option is for backorder report by item,require
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/inactrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006047 05165726372 014466 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INACTIVE REPORT BY GROUP,ITEM
=============================
This menu option is for inactive report group,item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@sldate1
Beginning Last Sale Date
Enter the begining of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@sldate2
Ending Last Sale Date
Enter the ending of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Number
Enter the begining inventory number for the inactive
report wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Number
Enter the ending inventory number for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venname1
Enter the begining vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@venname2
Enter the ending vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
act/help/poterm.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001355 05165726402 014334 0 ustar infoflex users !poterm
TERM CODE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
@tm
Term Code
This is the terms code that will uniquely identify the
terms conditions you are about to enter.
@description
Terms Description
This is a description of the terms.
@t
Type of Terms
This is a type of terms. Valid entries for this field are
(D, P, "blank").
@disc
Discount Days
This is a number of days from the time of the order that
will qualify the order for a discount.
@rate
Discount Rate
This is the discount rate applied to the order if payment
is made within discount days (see previous field).
@net
Net Days
The payment must be made within this number of days
otherwise the order will be subject to the penalties.
act/help/apvenr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002166 05165726364 014331 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT VENDORS BY CODE
=====================
This menu option is for usage print vendors by code
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the print vendors by
code you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the print vendors by code
you wish to print.
act/help/inactri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006025 05165726372 014464 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INACTIVE REPORT BY ITEM
=======================
This menu option is for inactive report item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@sldate1
Beginning Last Sale Date
Enter the begining of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@sldate2
Ending Last Sale Date
Enter the ending of the last sale date for the inactive
report you wish to print.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Number
Enter the begining inventory number for the inactive
report wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Number
Enter the ending inventory number for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the usage report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the usage report
you wish to print.
@venname1
Enter the begining vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
@venname2
Enter the ending vendor name for the inactive report
you wish to print.
act/help/slbckrs.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021067 05165726410 014472 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY SALESMAN,ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
================================================
This menu option is for backorder report by salesman,require
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/slbckrv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021061 05165726410 014467 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY VENDOR,ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
==============================================
This menu option is for backorder report by vendor,require
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/archk.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000016700 05165726365 014126 0 ustar infoflex users !archk
RECEIPT ENTRY SCREEN
====================
Receipts are entered in groups or batches; each batch
consisting of one or more receipts. Each receipt may be
applied to specific invoices and/or G/L Accounts. To enter a
receipt batch select option 9 on the Accounts Receivable
menu. The A/R receipts batch entry screen will appear as
shown below.
@module
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the receipt. "S-C" stands for Sales Cash
Receipt, and "R-C" stands for Accounts Receivable Cash
Receipt.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of adjustments for both editing
and auditing purposes. To return to an existing batch, press
the CHG function key then press the NEXT function key until
the correct batch is displayed.
@entdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date defaults to the system date. This date
represents the fiscal period to which this batch will be
posted.
@glcode
G/L Account
This field is the General Ledger account number to which the
receipts will be debited (usually a bank).
@chktotamount
Deposit Total
The total field will display the total amount of all
receipts within the batch.
@cusno
Customer ID Number
Enter the customer code and the customer name will then be
displayed. This field allows a maximum of 6 alphanumeric
characters.
@chkctl
Bank Control Number
This is not a required entry field and can be used to store
the bank control number or ABA number. This field allows a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
@chkno
Check Number
This is not a required entry field and can be used to store
the check number. This field allows a maximum of 10
alphanumeric characters.
@trandate
Date
Enter the Date of the Receipt. This date will be used to
calculate aging.
@chkamount
Amount
Enter the Receipt Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits.
@unapplied
This is not an entry field, but will display the amount of
funds you have NOT applied to Invoices.
!ardist
Enter Receipts
@glcode
G/L Account
This field is the General Ledger account number to which the
receipts will be applied.
@amount
Amount
Enter the Receipt Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits. While on this screen you may apply the
Receipt Amount across any number of G/L Accounts. A positive
value will debit the G/L Account and a negative value will
credit it.
!arreverse
While on the Receipt entry of the screen you may Reverse
previously posted receipts or enter receipts manually line
by line.
If you elected to retain a Receipt Register in the Control
File, you will be able to REVERSE previously posted Receipts
that have NOT been purged. Reversing Receipts is done by
pressing the REV function key while on the Customer Receipt
screen. Upon pressing this function key the popup screen for
Reversing Receipts will appear as follows:
After entering the appropriate information on this screen,
you will press the SAVE function key to Reverse the selected
Receipts.
@cusno
Customer ID Number
Enter the customer code and the customer name will then be
displayed. This field allows a maximum of 6 alphanumeric
characters.
@chkno
Check Number
This is a required entry field and can be used to store
the check number. This field allows a maximum of 10
alphanumeric characters. This check number must also be in
the receipt register.
@trandate
Date
Enter the Date of the Receipt.
@amount
Amount
Enter the Receipt Amount. This field is numeric and allows a
maximum of 9 digits.
!archkgl
With the manual method of entering Receipts, you will enter
them line by line. The manual method is also how you will
edit the results from your automatic selections. When using
the manual method of entering Receipts, you may apply
Receipt amounts to invoices and/or any G/L Accounts. To
apply a Receipt amount to G/L Accounts you will press the
G/L function key and the following screen will appear.
As you enter Receipts manually, you will encounter
additional entry screens for those customers who are Open
Item (customers where receipts are applied to specific
Invoices). The rest of this section on Receipt Entry deals
with the additional screens encountered for Open Item
customers. If all of your customers are Balance Forwa need
not read any further.
The additional screens for Open Item customers enable you to
easily apply receipts to specific invoices. The first of
these screens is the Invoice Payment screen. The Invoice
Payment screen will appear automatically whenever you enter
an amount for an Open Item customer. You may also gain
access to the Invoice Payment screen by pressing the ZOOM
function key while positioned on an Open Item customer's
follows.
!artselect
While on the Invoice Payment screen you may select a group
of invoices to pay, by pressing the SEL function key. Upon
pressing the SEL function key the following selection screen
will popup in the middle of the Invoice Payment screen:
@div
Division
Enter the division Number.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning invoice number of a range you wish to
pay. If no range is entered, all invoices with a non zero
amount will be selected.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending invoice number of a range you wish to
select.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning date of invoices you wish to select.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the last date of inoices you wish to select.
@discdate
Discount Date Cutoff
Enter the date of discount for the invoice you wish to
select.
@duedate
Due Date
Enter the latest due date for invoices to select.
@autopay
Autopay
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically pay the
invoices selected.
@autodisc
Automatic Discount
Set this to "Y" if you wish to automatically take the
discount for invoices selected and paid.
!ardelete
The Deletion screen allows you to enter a range of invoices
to remove from the list of invoices to pay. If you do not
enter an invoice range all invoices will be deleted. After
entering the appropriate information on this screen, you
will press the SAVE function key to start the deletion
process.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning invoice number of a range you wish to
pay. If no range is entered, all invoices with a non zero
amount will be selected.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending invoice number of a range you wish to
select.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning date of invoices you wish to select.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the last date of inoices you wish to select.
!arpay
INVOICE PAYMENT SCREEN
======================
The Invoice Payment Screen will appear automatically
whenever you enter an amount for an Open Item customer. You
may also gain access to this screen by pressing ZOOM while
positioned on an Open Item custmor's Receipt line.
@invno
Invoice Number
This is the invoice number being considered for payment.
@discamt
Discount Amount
This is the amount of the discount to be taken on payment of
this invoice.
@payamt
Amount Paid
Enter here the amount to pay against this invoice.
act/help/slbckrw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021071 05165726410 014471 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BACKORDER REPORT BY WAREHOUSE,ITEM, REQUIRE DATE
=================================================
This menu option is for backorder report by
warehouse,require date This screen has a number of entry
fields which you will need to fill in with appropriate
values. When you are sure all your entries are correct,
press the RUN funtion key to run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@reqdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
!ingrp
INVENTORY GROUP SCREEN
======================
@grp
Group
This is the group code used to classify types of inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Group.
!incat
INVENTORY CATEGORY SCREEN
=========================
@cat
Category
This is the category code used to further classify groups of
inventory.
@desc
Description
Enter a description for the Category.
!inven
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@grp
Group
The group field is a way of identifying related items for
reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see Setup
Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@cat
Category
The category field is another way of identifying related
items for reporting and G/L code generation purposes (see
Setup Division section). Pressing the HELP function key will
display valid entries for this field.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@Weight
This is the weight per unit of the item.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field contains the item number which the vendor uses
for this item. This field holds up to 12 characters.
@i
Inventory
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is an
inventory item and "N" if the item is non-inventory. An
example of a non-inventory item would be a service such as
Consulting, Freight, etc.
@s
Serialized
This field should be assigned a "Y" if serial numbers are to
be entered upon receipt and sale of the item, "S" if serial
numbers will be generated upon sale, and "N" if no serial
numbers are to be tracked.
@t
Taxable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is taxable
upon sale and "N" if not.
@d
Discountable
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item is
discountable upon sale and "N" if not.
@b
BOM
This field should be assigned a "Y" if the item has a Bill
of Materials defined for it, or "N" if otherwise.
@r
Reorder
This field should be assigned an "M" if reorder quantities
are calculated based on minimum and maximum quantities. You
should leave this field blank if you do not want this item
appear on your reorder reports.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@whn
Warehouse
This is the warehouse where the item is stored.
@loc
Loc
This field is used to specify a storage location for this
line item.
@qtymin
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtymax
Qty Maximum
This is an entry field for the maximum quantity you wish to
stock. The reorder report will recommend orders up to this
amount.
@qtyonorder
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyonhand
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
@qtycommit
Qty Committed
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently committed to open sales orders.
@qtybackord
Qty BackOrder
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
on back order. Back orders are generated from sales orders
as follows:
qty_backorder = qty_ordered - qty_committed
@qtyavail
Qty Available
This display-only field containing the quantity of this item
currently available. The quantity available is calculated
as:
qty_available = qty_onhand - qty_committed
!tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/apinvr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004277 05165726362 014421 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P INVOICE BATCH LISTING
=========================
This section describes how to print your invoice batches so
that errors can be discovered and corrected prior to
posting. Posting will be discussed in the next section.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter report destination. Four options are available:
S - screen
P - printer
D - disk
A - auxiliary port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers
you would enter the printer's device name after the "P".
The auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of reports copies you want. One to ten
copies can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
a title page should be printed for the report. A report
title page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen
with the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated (R=Receivable and
I=Invoice).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the range of vendor codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a vendor range the computer will print
all vendor.
act/help/inbom.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002357 05165726373 014144 0 ustar infoflex users !inven
INVENTORY UPDATE SCREEN
=======================
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@description
Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@unit
Units
The unit of measure is contained in this field. The selling
unit should be assigned here.
@venno
Vendor
This field is the vendor code representing the vendor from
whom this item is normally ordered.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@qtymn
Qty Minimum
This is an entry field for the minimum quantity you wish to
stock. Whenever the stock level reaches this quantity or
below, the item will appear on the reorder report as below
minimum so that the item can be reordered.
@qtyor
Qty On-order
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently on order from vendors.
@qtyre
Qty On-hand
This display-only field contains the quantity of this item
currently in stock.
act/help/sljrnrc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004133 05165726413 014502 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES JOURNAL REPORT BY CUSTOMER, INVOICE
=========================================
This menu option is for sales journal report by customer
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the begining sales invoices number you want to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending sales order invoices you want to print.
@invdate1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@invdate2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/inpurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001261 06665153262 014477 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@holdate
Last purge date
This is an non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@hpurdate
New purge date
Enter the New Purge Date. All inventory transaction data will be
purged prior to this date. Inventory transactions are generated
when inventory is purchased, sold, adjusted, transfered, or counted.
@invno1
Invoice no. range.
You may optionally enter a specific range of invoice numbers
to purge. If you do not then all posted invoiced will be
purged prior to the purge date entered above.
The sales invoice number that is currently being processed
will be displayed as the purging process takes place.
act/help/jcpurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000360 05165726400 014456 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@holdate
Last purge date
This is an non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@hpurdate
New purge date
Enter the New Purge Date. All inventories closed prior to
this date will be purged.
act/help/sldivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001646 05165726412 014335 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
This menu option is for division report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@div
Division Name
Enter division name.
act/help/glrpt.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007371 05165726372 014170 0 ustar infoflex users !glrpt
FINANCIAL REPORT CREATION
=========================
When the entry screen appears you will fill in the header
information such as report name, titles and column headings.
You have the capability of entering up to 6 different column
headings. The column headings may be defined in the report
formula table (see option ENTER REPORT FORMULAS on the
General Ledger menu) or defined as you go. Press the F14 key
to enter the column header and formula specific to this
report. You can use the HELP key to review the heading
choices while you are in the Financial Report Creation
screen.
When you are finished entering the heading information press
the SAVE key and the cursor will jump to the detail portion
of the screen. In the detail portion of the screen you will
define the format of each report line such as description,
cr/db, values, column headings and their operators.
To define account ranges for each report line press the ZOOM
key. The General Ledger number ranges consist of any number
of from-to sets of G/L numbers. The line values will include
information from each G/L record between the from G/L and
the to G/L number. The wild card '?' may be used. For
example:
121-000 123-000
12?-000
!glrpt1
@rpn
Report Name
Enter the Name for this report.
@title1
Title Line 1
Enter the first line of the title of this report.
@title2
Title Line 2
Enter the second line of the title of this report.
@h1
Column 1 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 1.
@h2
Column 2 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 2.
@h3
Column 3 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 3.
@h4
Column 4 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 4.
@h5
Column 5 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 5.
@h6
Column 6 Heading
Enter the Column Heading for column 6.
@description
Description
Enter the description for the report output line.
@crdb
Debit/Credit
Enter a "C" if this is a credit line, or a "D" if this is to
be a debit line.
@vars
Accumulators
Enter up to 5 accumulators (lowercase alpha characters
only).
@1
Column 1
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
@2
Column 2
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
@3
Column 3
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
@4
Column 4
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
@5
Column 5
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
@6
Column 6
Enter an accumulator, 0 for no printing, "-", "=", or press
F14 to enter a calculation.
ADVANCED REPORTING FEATURES
This section discusses how to perform calculations.
All cell's on your financial statement are calculated by a
formula. The column formula for a cell may be overriden by
pressing the F14. The formulas may include the following:
Parentheses
'(' and ')'
Arithmetic Operators
'*', '/', '+', and '-'
Constants
These include all decimal numbers.
Variables
The variables include cm(current month postings),
cy(current year balance), pm(monthly postings this month
last year), py(yearly balance this month last year),
bm(current months budget), by(current ytd budget). These
variables pertain to the current line.
!gldetail
G/L RANGE ENTRY
===============
This screen allows the entry of a range of account code to
be included in a single line printing. Wildcard are
allowed.
@glcode1
Beginning G/L Code
Enter the beginning number of the range to be included.
@glcode2
Ending G/L Code
Enter the ending number of the range to be included.
act/help/slterm.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001364 05165726414 014337 0 ustar infoflex users !slterm
TERM CODE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
%
%
@tm
Term Code
This is the terms code that will uniquely identify the
terms conditions you are about to enter.
@description
Terms Description
This is a description of the terms.
@t
Type of Terms
This is a type of terms. Valid entries for this field are
(D, P, "blank").
@disc
Discount Days
This is a number of days from the time of the order that
will qualify the order for a discount.
@rate
Discount Rate
This is the discount rate applied to the order if payment
is made within discount days (see previous field).
@net
Net Days
The payment must be made within this number of days
otherwise the order will be subject to the penalties.
act/help/sltax.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001124 05165726414 014156 0 ustar infoflex users !sltax
TAX CODE ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
%
%
@tx
Tax Code
Enter the tax code.
@st
State
Enter the state for this tax code.
@description
Description
Enter descriptive information about the tax code.
Once the above data has been entered correctly, press the
SAVE function key to save the information and proceed to the
distibution portion of the tax item.
@mrate
Rate Percent
Enter the tax per-centage rate for this state.
@drate
Tax Rate
Enter a tax rate.
@ddescription
Description
Enter descriptive information about the tax rate.
act/help/pytaxr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001735 05165726406 014444 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@au
Tax Authority
Enter the tax authority or level of government to which the
tax is reported. This code is "FE" for federal, the state
code abbreviation for states, and your own two character
code for local.
@code
Taxes Code
Enter the tax code to uniquely identify the tax. There are a
number of predefined tax codes which must not be changed.
These are:
act/help/glpurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001034 05165726372 014473 0 ustar infoflex users !select
request id is ljp-1963 (standard input)
Purge
This section describes how to Purge Data from the General
Ledger system.
@purdate
New Purge Date
This is the purge date. All data with a period date less
than this purge date will be purged.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter an account code. The entry must be valid account
numbers already designated in the system.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter an account code. The entry must be valid account
numbers already designated in the system.
act/help/polines.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004633 05165726401 014500 0 ustar infoflex users !polines
Order Detail Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
==================================
@invno
Purchase Order #
The purchase order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@venno
Vendor
The vendor ID entered on the prior screen is displayed here
followed by the vendor's name.
@trandate
Order
The date entered on the prior screen is displayed in this
field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the purchase
order.
@invenno
Item Number
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display the contents of the Inventory Master file, and
you can use the ZOOM function from the HELP table to Add to
or Change the Inventory Master file.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field defaults to the vendor part number in the
Inventory Master file, however, alphanumeric characters can
be entered into this field.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity you are ordering in this field.
@qtyre
Qty Rec
This field is empty until goods are received on the purchase
order.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit ordered. This value will print on
the purchase order and defaults to the cost value contained
in the inventory master file. The unit field displays the
unit value from the inventory master.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the purchase order.
@jobno
Job Number
The job number for which this product is being ordered
should be entered here. If there is no job number being
used, and the product is for stock replenishment, leave this
field blank.
@etadate
Estimated Arrival Date
Enter here the estimated arrival date of the order. If a
job number entry was made in the last field, the date shown
here will be the earliest date entered under the jobs
fields.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Warehouse
This field is the warehouse as identified on the first page
of the p/o entry form.
act/help/inadjr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003673 05165726373 014372 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT BATCH LISTING
==================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invenno1
Beginning Inventory Item Number
Enter the first of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print. If you do not enter an item numbers
range the computer will print all inventory items. You may
press the HELP function key to view the list of valid items
numbers.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Item Number
Enter the last of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print.
act/help/helpgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003037 05165726372 014455 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX
AccountFlex is a powerful full featured accounting system
based on leading edge software technology. AccountFlex is
written in an SQL based 4GL language called Infoflex which
is compatible with Informix, C-isam, SCO Integra, Micro
Focus Cobol, or SUN Netisam data bases. The AccountFlex
system consists of a number modules that may be purchased
separately and, if necessary, can be customized by our
staff.These modules, which are listed below, provide
comprehensive tracking and control over financial an
operational aspects of your business.
Order Entry
Accounts Receivable
Inventory
Purchasing
Accounts Payable
General Ledger
Payroll
All AccountFlex modules have in common the following
features:
Easy-to-learn user interface with on-line help information
and fast response time.
Maintains all months and years open for inputint, reporting,
and viewing documents, thereby, eliminating the need for
closing periods.
Allows extensive on-screen inquiries.
Supports multiple divisions and multiple warehousing.
Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes (i.e. vendor code,
invoice number, etc.).
Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a
menu-driven user interface.
act/help/arglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002452 05165726367 014227 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/slinvr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004346 05165726413 014431 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES INVOICE
===================
This menu option is for print picking list
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
First Invoice Number
Enter the begining sales invoices number you want to print.
@invno2
Last Inovice Number
Enter the ending sales invoices number you want to print.
@podate1
Begining Invoice Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@msg1
Invoice Message
Enter here any message to the customer that you would wish
to print on the invoice.
@msg2
Invoice Message - Line 2
This Line is for a continuation of the line above.
act/help/apchkpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003013 05165726361 014534 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P CHECK POSTING JOURNAL
=========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report. dn=disk
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending range of vendor codes you would like to
print.
@postno
Post Number
Enter post number you would like to print.
@chkno1
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like
to print.
@chkno2
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers you would like to
print.
act/help/slinvr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004504 05165726413 014426 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES INVOICE (Internal)
==============================
This menu option is for printing the Sales Invoices. This
option will allow you to print posted or unposted invoices.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will nee
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to ru
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
First Invoice Number
Enter the begining sales invoices number you want to print.
@invno2
Last Inovice Number
Enter the ending sales invoices number you want to print.
@podate1
Begining Invoice Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@msg1
Invoice Message
Enter here any message to the customer that you would wish
to print on the invoice.
@msg2
Invoice Message - Line 2
This Line is for a continuation of the line above.
act/help/arcusi.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004067 05165726366 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !arcusi
CUSTOMER INQUIRY SCREEN
=======================
This section describes the customer inquiry screen. With
this screen, you can view customer invoices and balances.
You will not be allowed to make changes while on this
screen.
When the screen appears, enter the customer you would like
to view. The information about that customer will
immediately appear. While on this screen you can display the
customer's Aging amounts by pressing the function key
labeled AGE. The Aging Screen will popup as follows.
To view the list of invoices with balances due for this
customer, press the SAVE function key. The invoices will be
displayed in the MULTI- RECORD portion of the screen. While
on the Invoice portion of the screen you may press the ZOOM
key to display detail information about any invoice that the
cursor is positioned on. The Invoice Detail screen will
appear as follows.
@cusno
Enter the customer code to identify the customer in the
system.
@contact
Contact Person
This is the contact person for this customer.
@telephone
Tel:
The telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@tc
Terms Code
Enter the Terms Code for that customer.
@cred
Credit Code
Enter the credit code of the customer.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
Enter the credit limit for the customer.
@invno
Invoice Number
The invoice number for this item.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The Invoice Date.
@description
Description
Description of the invoice, if any given.
@amountdue
Amount Due
The balance still owed on the invoice.
!aropen
OPEN ITEMS DISPLAY
==================
@artrandat
Transaction Date
The Transaction date for this open invoice.
@M
Module
The module which generated this invoice.
@S
Source
The source of this invoice.
@BATCH
Batch
This is the batch number from which this invoice was posted.
@adescription
Description
This is the description of this invoice.
@adiscount
Discount
This is the amount of discount available for this invoice.
@aamount
Amount
This is the balance due on this invoice.
act/help/poglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002446 05165726400 014232 0 ustar infoflex users !select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/inprc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005026 05165726374 014150 0 ustar infoflex users
!inprc
INVENTORY ENTRY SCREEN
======================
The Inventory screen has both SINGLE-RECORD and MULTI-
RECORD portions. The SINGLE-RECORD portion is where you will
define an Inventory Item and the MULTI-RECORD portion is
where you will define each warehouse carrying the item. In
addition, there is a popup viewing screen for serial numbers
which is initiated by pressing the SNO function key.
@invenno
Item Number
This field is for your item Number. Item Numbers can consist
of up to 12 characters. Any part of the AccountFlex System
that makes use of the Inventory File searches for data by
referring to this field.
@description
Description
The description field is 35 character long. The description
entered here will be printed on Invoices, Purchase Orders,
etc.
@bprice
Base Price
The base price is normally the lowest selling price you are
willing to accept on a regular basis for your products.
@dprice
Disc Price
This is the discount price usually given to dealers or
employees.
@price
List Price
The list price field contains the end-user selling price.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
of each item. You may press the HELP function key for a list
of valid entries. For further information about this field
refer to the section on setting up prices.
@cost_avg
Avg Cost
This is the weighted average cost calculated by dividing the
purchase cost by the quantity purchased.
@cost_std
Std Cost
Std or Standard cost is a cost value assigned by the user.
@cost_rpl
Rpl Cost
Rpl or Replacement Cost is the last purchase cost for this
item.
@pr1
Customer Price Code
This is the customer price code.
@description
Description
Enter a description for the price code entry.
@type
Cost/Price Type
This is the Cost/Price type to indicate either costing or
price basis.
@markup
Percent Markup
Enter the percent markup expected on this item.
@qtybrk
Quantity Break
Enter the quantity required to acheive this pricing code.
!inprc2
INVENTORY PRICE CODE ENTRY
==========================
@pr1
Customer Price
This is the customer price code type.
@description
Description
Enter a description for the price code entry.
@t
Cost/Price Type
This is the Cost/Price type to indicate either costing or
price basis.
@markup
Percent Markup
Enter the percent markup expected on this item.
@qtybrk
Quantity Break
Enter the quantity required to acheive this pricing code.
act/help/archkp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002446 05165726365 014310 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R RECEIPTS POSTING
====================
This section describes how to Post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Receivable. It is important that
your receipts be correctly entered before posting. This is
because once your data has been posted it can no longer be
modified.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the receipt will be displayed here.
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last batch
posted.
Invoice
The invoice number that the receipt is being posted to will
be displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last receipt po
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/arcusr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001706 05165726366 014336 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT CUSTOMERS BY CODE
=======================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
act/help/arsthele.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003751 05165726370 014643 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT STATEMENTS
================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@stdate1
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate2
Enter the ending range of transaction date you would like to
print. All transactions having a transaction date between
the specified range will be printed. Transactions prior to
the starting date will be summarized as beginning balances.
If you do not enter a date range the computer will print al
transactions.
@balance1
Enter the beginning range of customer balance you would like
to omit.
@balance2
Enter the ending range of customer balance you would like to
omit. If you do not enter a Balance range the computer will
print all customers.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
@a
Age by (T)ransaction, (P)eriod, (D)ue, or (X)Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
act/help/brgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001367 05165726371 014133 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Bank Reconciliation
The AccountFlex Bank Reconciliation module tracks the status of
up to five G/L account codes, extracting data for periodic recon-
ciliation from the general ledger and all check writing modules.
Below are some of its features:
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
(more)
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a
menu-driven user interface.
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/arinvpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003552 05165726367 014603 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R INVOICE POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
This section describes how to print the Posting Journal
Report. This report will print the posted invoice batches
which must match with the batch report printed prior to
posting.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the range of customer codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a customer range the computer will
print all customers.
act/help/slglr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002446 05165726412 014235 0 ustar infoflex users !select
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/slcusi.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000012711 05165726412 014327 0 ustar infoflex users !slcusi
CUSTOMER INQUIRE SCREEN
=======================
With this screen you can view customer invoices and
balances. You will not be allowed to make changes while on
this screen. While on this screen you can display the
customer's Aging amounts by pressing the function key
labeled AGE.
@cusno
Customer
Enter customer code to identify the customer in the system.
@name
Customer Name
The customer name.
@contact
Customer Contact
The name of the person to be contact.
@phone
Phone Number of Contact Person
The phone number of the person to be contact.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
The amount of credit limit given to the customer.
@curbalance
Current Balance
Customer's current balance.
@saledate
Date of last Sale
The date of the last sale posted to the system.
!agescreen
Customer Aging Screen
=====================
@w
Aging periods are taken from the A/R control file.
Press the ESCAPE key to return from the Aging screen.
To view the list of orders for this customer, press the
SAVE function key. The orders will be displayed in
the MULTI-RECORD portion of the screen.
!slcusordi
While on the orders portion of the screen you may press the
ZOOM key to display detail information about any order that
the cursor is positioned on.
The Order screen will appear. To return to previous screens,
press the ESCAPE key. To view the list of invoices with
balances due for this customer, press the SAVE function key.
The invoices will be displayed in the MULTI-RECORD portion
of the screen.
!slcusinvi
While on the Invoice portion of the screen you may press the
ZOOM key to display detail information about any invoice
that the cursor is positioned on.
!slordi
!slorddetail
@ordno
Order No.
This is the unique order number assigned to each sales
order.
@orddate
Order Date
The date printed on the sales order will show here.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This field shows the warehouse code from which the
products shipped.
@price
Price
The price of the order is displayed in this field.
!slordlin
Line Items
==========
The Line Items screen shows each inventory item
ordered and their quantities.
@ordno
Order #
The sales order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@cusno
Customer
The customer ID is displayed here followed by the customer's
name.
@orddate
Order Date
The order date is displayed in this field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item.
@invenno
Item
The part number for the item ordered.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
The quantity ordered.
@qtyco
Qty Commit
The quantity committed to this line item. The quantity here
is available in inventory.
@qtysh
Qty Shipped
The quantity shipped.
@price
Price/Unit
The price per unit.
@priceshext
Ext.Price
The extended price for the committed quantity is displayed
in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the sales order.
@reqdate
Required Date
The required date field is an unlabeled field located below
the commit quantity field.
@taxable
Tax Flag
The tax flag field is an unlabeled field located below the
ship quantity field.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This field shows the warehouse code from which the
products shipped.
@
!slinvi
@invno
Invoice No.
This is the invoice number as entered or posted to the
system.
@trandate
Invoice Date
This is the date the invoice was printed.
@ordno
Order No.
This is the unique order number assigned to each sales
order.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This field shows the warehouse code from which the order
shipped.
@pricesh
Price
This is the price based on ship quantities.
@pricedue
Balance Due
This is the balance due on the invoice.
!slinvdetail
Line Items
==========
The Line Items screen for each inventory item ordered and
their quantities.
@ordno
Order #
The sales order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here.
@cusno
Customer
The customer ID is displayed here followed by the customer's
name.
@orddate
Order Date
The date of the order.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item.
@invenno
Item
The part number for the item ordered.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
The quantity ordered.
@qtysh
The quantity shipped.
@price
Price/Unit
The price per unit.
@priceshext
Ext.Price
The extended price for the committed quantity is displayed
in this field.
@description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the sales order.
@reqdate
Required Date
The required date field is an unlabeled field located below
the commit quantity field. The required date defaults to
the order date and represents the date that the item is
required by the customer.
@t
Tax Flag
The tax flag field is an unlabeled field located below the
ship quantity field. The tax flag defaults to whatever the
taxable flag is set to on the inventory file. This flag is
"Y" if the item is taxable and "N" if the item is not
taxable. This field may be overridden by the user.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This field shows the warehouse code from which the order
shipped.
act/help/inprcr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003354 05165726374 014415 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PRICES BY CUSTOMER PRICE CODE
===================================
This menu option is for print prices by customer price code
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@cu1
Beginning Customer Price Code
Enter the begining customer price code range you wish to
print.
@cu2
Ending Customer Price Code
Enter the ending customer price code range you wish to
print.
@pr1
Beginning Inventory Price Code
Enter the begining inventory price code range you wish to
print.
@pr2
Ending Inventory Price Code
Enter the ending inventory price code range you wish to
print.
act/help/inprcr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003355 05165726374 014417 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
PRINT PRICES BY CUSTOMER PRICE CODE
===================================
This menu option is for print prices by customer price code
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@cu1
Beginning Customer Price Code
Enter the begining customer price code range you wish to
print.
@cu2
Ending Customer Price Code
Enter the ending customer price code range you wish to
print.
@pr1
Beginning Inventory Price Code
Enter the begining inventory price code range you wish to
print.
@pr2
Ending Inventory Price Code
Enter the ending inventory price code range you wish to
print.
act/help/inprcr3.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005221 05165726375 014413 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PRICES BY INVENTORY ITEM
==============================
This menu option is for print prices by inventory item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@cu1
Beginning Customer Price Code
Enter the begining customer price code range for the
customer price code you wish to print.
@cu2
Ending Customer Price Code
Enter the ending customer price code range for the
customer price code you wish to print.
@pr1
Beginning Inventory Price Code
Enter the begining inventory price code for the customer
price code you wish to print.
@pr2
Ending Inventory Price Code
Enter the ending inventory price code for the customer
price code you wish to print.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Items
Enter the begining inventory items for the customer price
code wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Items
Enter the ending inventory items for the customer price code
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining inventory group number for the price code
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending inventory group number for the price code
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the customer price
code you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the customer price
code you wish to print.
@default
Include Defaults
Include default code in this report. If you do not want
them included, change this to "N".
act/help/inprcr4.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005221 05165726375 014414 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PRICES BY INVENTORY ITEM
==============================
This menu option is for print prices by inventory item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@cu1
Beginning Customer Price Code
Enter the begining customer price code range for the
customer price code you wish to print.
@cu2
Ending Customer Price Code
Enter the ending customer price code range for the
customer price code you wish to print.
@pr1
Beginning Inventory Price Code
Enter the begining inventory price code for the customer
price code you wish to print.
@pr2
Ending Inventory Price Code
Enter the ending inventory price code for the customer
price code you wish to print.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Items
Enter the begining inventory items for the customer price
code wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Items
Enter the ending inventory items for the customer price code
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining inventory group number for the price code
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending inventory group number for the price code
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the customer price
code you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the customer price
code you wish to print.
@default
Include Defaults
Include default code in this report. If you do not want
them included, change this to "N".
act/help/pyearn.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002361 05165726404 014324 0 ustar infoflex users !pyearn
EARNING SCREEN
==============
This screen describes how to set up your earnings. It is
important that the earnings table be set up properly prior
to entering pay checks.
@code
Code
Enter the earning code to uniquely identify the earning
type.
@description
Description
Enter the description of the earning code.
@factor
Rate Factor
Enter the rate factor for the earning type. The rate factor
is used to determine premium rates of pay by multiplying
the rate factor times the normal pay rate.
amount = ratefactor X payrate X payunits (usually
hours)
(more)
%
A rate factor of 1 is assigned to regular earning, a rate
factors of 1.5 is usually assigned to overtime earning, and
a rate factor of 2 is usually assigned to doubletime. You
should leave the rate factor field blank if the earning t is
hours).
@n
Incl Net?
Enter "Y" to include or "N" to exclude this earning from
the employee's net pay. Including or excluding this
earning from net pay does not affect taxable income.
Earnings may be excluded from taxable income by
specifying exclusion in the tax tables.
@f
Fringe?
Enter "Y" if this fringe benefit must be reported in box 17
of the W-2 form.
act/help/slrecr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004215 05165726414 014402 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES QUOTE
=================
This menu option is for print sales quote
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@ordno1
Beginning Quote Number
Enter the begining quote number you want to print.
@ordno2
Ending Quote Number
Enter the ending quote number you want to print.
@podate1
Beginning Quote Date
Enter the begining dates for the quotes you wish to print .
All sales orders with dates between those entered will be
printed.
@podate2
Ending Quote Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@msg1
Message
Enter here any message you wish to print on the quote.
@msg2
Message - Line 2
This is a continuation line for the message.
act/help/arrec.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002234 05165726367 014131 0 ustar infoflex users !arrec
A/R RECURRING INVOICES
======================
This section describes the process of Entering Recurring
Invoices into your Accounts Receivable program.
Recurring Invoices are entered individually. Each Invoice
may have any number of distributions.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the customer screen. The cursor will
then jump to the distribution screen where the distributions
relating to the recurring invoice should be entered.
@cusno
Customer Number
The customer code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters.
@invno
Reference Number
This is not a required entry field. The reference number
allows you to group recurring invoices. The field holds a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The desription allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters.
@glcode
G/L Account Code
Enter the Account Code. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
act/help/slrecr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004311 05165726414 014400 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES QUOTE ( Internal )
==============================
This menu option is for print sales quote
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@qteno1
Begining Quote Number
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@qteno2
Ending Quote Number
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@podate1
Beginning Quote Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales quotes you wish to
print . All sales quotes with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Ending Quote Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales quotes you wish to
print . All sales quotes with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@msg1
Message Line
Enter here any message you wish to print on the quote.
@msg2
Message Line - Line 2
This is a continuation field for the message line.
act/help/slhisrc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005231 05165726412 014473 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY CUSTOMER, ITEM, INVOICE
===============================================
This menu option is for sales history report by customer
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/gltrial.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003513 05165726372 014470 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L TRIAL BALANCE REPORT
========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter the beginning range of account numbers you would
like to print.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter the ending range of account numbers you would like
to print. If you do not enter an account range the
computer will print all accounts.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of period date you would like
to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of period date you would like to
print.
@inactive
Include Inactive Accounts?
This field determine if inactive G/L Accounts will be
include in the report. The default is "N" so that only
Accounts with non-zero balances and no activity will be
included in the report. To include all accounts in the
report, change this to "Y".
act/help/slbokrc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005242 05165726411 014464 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY CUSTOMER,ITEM,ORDER DATE
============================================
This menu option is for booking report by
customer,item,order date This screen has a number of entry
fields which you will need to fill in with appropriate
values. When you are sure all your entries are correct,
press the RUN funtion key to run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slhisrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005220 05165726412 014475 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY GROUP,ITEM, INVOICE
============================================
This menu option is for sales history report by group
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slhisri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005203 05165726412 014500 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY ITEM, INVOICE
======================================
This menu option is for sales history report by item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slbokrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005230 05165726411 014465 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM,ORDER DATE
=========================================
This menu option is for booking report by group,item,order
date This screen has a number of entry fields which you will
need to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure
all your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to
run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/inbomr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002774 05165726373 014331 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INVENTORY REPORT
================
This menu option is for usage inventory report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invenno1
Begining Inventory Dates
Enter the begining inventory dates for the valuation
report wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Dates
Enter the ending inventory dates for the valuation report
you wish to print.
act/help/slbokri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005206 05165726411 014472 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY ITEM,ORDER DATE
===================================
This menu option is for booking report by item,order date
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/arregr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004670 05165726370 014400 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R RECEIPT REGISTER BY CUSTOMER
================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptgl
List G/L Accounts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list G/L accounts.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes that you want to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print everything by default. These codes must exist in
the customer table.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the ending range of check date that you want to print.
All transactions will print that have a Check date between
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range the
computer will default and print everything.
act/help/arregr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004640 05165726370 014376 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R RECEIPT REGISTER
====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptgl
List G/L Accounts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list G/L accounts.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes that you want to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print everything by default. These codes must exist in
the customer table.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the ending range of check date that you want to print.
All transactions will print that have a Check date between
the specified range. If you do not enter a date range the
computer will default and print everything.
act/help/apadjp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002665 05165726361 014276 0 ustar infoflex users !select
Post Adjustment Batches
This section describes how to Post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Payable. It is important that
your adjustments be correctly entered before posting. This
is because once your data has been posted it can no longer
be modified.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin POSTING or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the Data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the adjustment will be displayed here.
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last batch
posted.
Transaction
The invoice number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last invoice
posted.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Payable menu.
act/help/slhisrs.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005231 05165726412 014513 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY SALESMAN, ITEM, INVOICE
===============================================
This menu option is for sales history report by salesman
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/tbwhs.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001314 05165726415 014154 0 ustar infoflex users !tbwhs
WAREHOUSE ENTRY SCREEN
======================
This section describes how to setup your warehouses. It is
important that your warehouses be set up properly prior to
enter transaction.
The first step in setting up your warehouses is to select
the Enter Warehouse Entry Screen will appear.
%
%
@whs
Warehouse Number
Enter the warehouse code.
@div
Division Code
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@name
Warehouse Name
Enter the warehouse name.
@address1
Warehouse Address
Enter the warehouse address.
@city
Warehouse City
Enter the warehouse city.
@st
Warehouse State
Enter the warehouse state.
@zip
Warehouse Zip Code
Enter the warehouse zip code.
act/help/pyemp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000211307 07036470621 014156 0 ustar infoflex users !pyemp1
EMPLOYEE ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
While on this first screen you may ADD a new Employee or
CHANGE existing ones. The following two subsections describe
how to ADD or CHANGE.
%
ADD
To ADD a new employee press the ADD function key (F4) to
switch the screen to ADD mode. You will know whether you are
in ADD mode by the mode message that appears at the top of
the screen. Once in ADD mode, the first field you will enter
is the employee code. Your employee code will identify the
employee throughout the system. After entering the employee
code, press the RETURN key to enter the next field on the
screen. When you have filled in all of the employee fields,
press the SAVE function key to save the employee
information. Upon pressing the SAVE key the screen will
clear and make itself ready for the next employee addition.
CHANGE
To CHANGE an existing employee first be sure you are in
CHANGE mode by pressing the CHG function key (F4) if
necessary. You will know whether you are in CHANGE mode by
the mode message that appears at the top of the screen. Once
you are in CHANGE mode, enter the employee code you wish to
locate and press the RETURN key. The employee information
will then be displayed and you may cursor to any field
(except the employee code) and change its contents. If you
would like to search for employees by name, you may do so by
pressing the SRCH function key. The Search function is
described in Chapter 2. After you have made all of the
changes you wish, press the SAVE function key to save the
changes. %
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code to identify the employee in the
system.
@socsecno
Soc. Sec. No.
Enter the employee's social security number.
@lname
Last Name
Enter the employee's last name.
@m
Middle Initial
Enter the employee's middle initial.
@fname
First Name
Enter the employee's first name.
@address
Address
Enter the employee's home address.
@city
City
Enter the employee's home city.
@st
State
Enter the employee's home state.
@zip
Zip
Enter the employee's home zip code.
@phone
Phone
Enter the employee's home phone number.
@contact
Contact
Enter person to contact in case of emergency.
@conphone
Phone
Enter phone number of emergency contact.
@s
Sex
Enter "M" for male and "F" for female.
@e
EEO
Enter Equal Opportunity classification:
1=White, 2=Black,
3=Hispanic, 4=Asian,
5=Indian, Handicap, 7=Vietname Veteran,
8=Disabled.
@x
EEO-1
Enter Equal Opportunity Categories:
1 = Officials & Managers
2 = Professionals
3 = Technicians
4 = Sales
5 = Office Clerical
6 = Craft Workers (semi-skilled)
7 = Operatives (semi-skilled)
8 = Laborers (unskilled)
9 = Service Workers
@sdp
Sub Department Code
Enter Sub Department Code. This code can be used to control the
G/L code when posting (see the 'Enter Department' option).
@empstatus
Employee Status
Enter Status: A=Active, I=Inactive, P=Temporary, T=Terminated
@statdate
Employee Status Date
Enter effective date of employee status
@licenseno
Drivers License
Enter the employee's driver's license number.
@licdate
Expire
Enter the employee's driver's license expiration date.
@insno
INS No
Enter Imigration Work Permit Number.
@insdate
Expire
Enter Imigration Work Permit Expiration.
@birthdat
Birth
Enter birth date.
@hiredate
Hire
Enter hire date.
@promdate
Promotion
Enter last promotion date.
@termdate
Termination
Enter termination date.
@r
Rehirable(Y/N)
Enter whether employee is rehirable (Y=Yes, N=No).
@dpt
Department
Enter Department Code (press HELP key to see code list).
!pyemp2
@t
Pay Type
Enter U=Units, S=Salary, or C=Commission. You will enter
"U" for hourly and piece work employees.
@payrate
Rate/Salary
Enter rate of pay per unit (usually hours) for employee's
with a pay type of "U" (Unit) or enter a salary amount for
employee's with a pay type of "S" (Salaried).
@payunit
Normal Units
Enter normal number of units (usually hours) worked per pay
period.
@g
Pay Group
When generating checks, you use the group code to identify
the employees you want to pay. We recommend using different
group codes for different pay cycles such as D=Daily,
W=Weekly, B=Bi-weekly, S=Semi-monthly, M=Monthly,
Q=Quarterly, A=Annually.
@per
Pay Periods
Enter number of times this employee will be paid per year
(ex. monthly=12,weekly=52). This number is important for
calculating taxes.
@1
FICA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employee is exempt from Social Security Tax.
@2
FUTA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employer is exempt from Federal Unemployment
Tax.
@3
SUTA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employer is exempt from State Unemployment
@wcla
Workers Compensation Class
Enter Worker's Compensation Class Code (or blank for
exempt).
@ff
Federal Tax Authority
This field is automatically assigned "FE" which stands for
federal authority.
@F
Federal Status
Enter Federal tax status code using M=Married or S=Single.
@FE
Federal #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
@FWEXTRA
Federal Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular Federal
withholding.
@FWFIXED
Federal Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular Federal
withholding.
@SS
State Tax Authority
Enter State Tax Authority. This is normally the two
character state code (CA=California, WA=Washington, etc.).
@S
State Status
Enter State tax status code (M=married, S=Single, H=Head
of House).
@SE
State #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
@SWEXTRA
State Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular State
withholding.
@SWFIXED
State Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular State
withholding.
@LL
Local Tax Authority
Enter Local Tax Authority.
@L
Local Status
Enter Local tax status code (I.E. M=married, S=Single).
@LE
Local #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
@LWEXTRA
Local Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular Local
withholding.
@LWFIXED
Local Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular Local
withholding.
@A
EIC Status
Enter EIC tax status code using "1" for employee filing or
"2" for both employee and spouse filing.
@vacvail
Vacation Avail
Amount of vacation time available.
This field is calcualated as follows:
Available = Carryover + Accrued - Used.
@vacprev
Vacation Carryover
Enter vacation time carried over from previous years.
@vaccur
Vacation Accrued
Enter vacation time for this year. If a vacation rate is specified
this field will automatically increment for each check issued.
@vacused
Vacation Used
Enter vacation time used this year. This field will automatically be
incremented by the amount of vacation time specifed on the checks.
@vacdate
Vacation Start
Enter the date when vacation time will begin accruing.
@vacrate
Vacation Rate
Enter accrual rate for vacation time.
@vacrateunit
Vacation Accrual Rate Unit
Enter accrual rate unit (U=Unit or D=Days).
@vacunit
Vacation Accrual Frequency
Enter accrual frequency (U=per Unit worked, P=per Pay Period).
@peravail
Personal Avail
Number of personal time available.
This field is calcualated as follows:
Available = Carryover + Accrued - Used.
@perprev
Personnel Leave Carryover
Enter personal time carried over from previous years
@percur
Personnel Leave Accrued
Enter personal time for this year.
@perused
Personnel Leave Used
Enter personal days used this year. This field will automatically be
incremented by the amount of personal time specifed on the checks.
@perdate
Personal Start
Enter the date when personal time will begin accruing.
@perrate
Personal Rate
Enter accrual rate for personal time.
@perrateunit
Personal Accrual Rate Unit
Enter accrual rate unit (U=Unit or D=Days).
@perunit
Personal Accrual Frequency
Enter accrual frequency (U=per Unit worked, P=per Pay Period).
@sickvail
Sick Leave Avail
Number of sick time available.
This field is calculated as follows:
Available = Carryover + Accrued - Used.
@sickprev
Sick Time Carryover
Enter sick time carried over from previous years
@sickcur
Sick Time Accrued
Enter sick time for this year
@sickused
Sick Time Used
Enter sick time used this year
@sickdate
Sick Start
Enter the date when sick time will begin accruing.
@sickrate
Sick Rate
Enter accrual rate for sick time.
@sickrateunit
Sick Accrual Rate Unit
Enter accrual rate unit (U=Unit or D=Days).
@sickunit
Sick Accrual Frequency
Enter accrual frequency (U=per Unit worked, P=per Pay Period).
!pyemp3
@hiredate
Hire Date
Enter hire date
@s
Referral Source
Enter referral source:1=Unsolicited,2=Agency,3=Add,4=Employee Ref,5=Other
@r
Rehireable
Enter whether employee is rehirable(Y=Yes, N=No)
@p
Personnel Change Notice Form Print Flag
Enter 'Y' to print Personnel Change Notice Form
@lastdate
Last Review Date
Enter last review date
@promdate
Last Promotion Date
Enter last promotion date
@raisdate
Last Salary Increase Date
Enter last raise date
@raiseamt
Last Salary Increase Amount
Enter last raise amount
@nextdate
Next Review Date
Enter next review date
@d
Dependent Life Insurance Flag
Does employee have Dependent Life Insurance? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
@b
Basic Life Insurance Flag
Does employee have Basic Life Insurance? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
@l
Long Term Disability Flag
Does employee have Long Term Disabilty? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
@med
Medical Carrier
Enter Medical carrier(CHMO=Cigna HMO,CIND=Cigna Indemnity,WELL=Wellcare)
@y
Medical Coverage Flag
Is Medical Covered? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
@z
Dental Coverage Flag
Is Dental Covered? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
@4
401K Eligibility Flag
Is employee eligible for a 401K plan? (Y=Yes,N=No,blank=No)
!pyemp4
@ded
Deduction
Enter deduction code (Press HELP key to see list). The
deduction description will automatically appear upon
entering the code.
@dedperiods
Deduct Periods
This field is used to schedule the deduction. Each character
position of this 12 character field represents a deduction
period. You signify whether the deduction will be taken by
entering a blank, "Y", or "N" in the period's character
position. Blank or "Y" indicate the deduction is to be taken
and "N" indicates it is not. If a deduction is taken on
every pay check you would leave this field blank. To specify
a deduction that is taken in periods 1, 3, and 7 type:
YNYNNNYNNNNN
This field comes into play during check generation. The
deduction period you enter prior to check generation will be
checked against this field to determine whether to take the
deduction.
@t
Type
Enter deduction amount type (A=Amount, P=Percent,
R=Rate).
@dedamt
Amount
Enter deduction amount (amount, rate, or percent depending
on your answer to the Type screen field).
@dedmaxamt
Maximum
Enter maximum amount for deduction. Once the maximum is
reached, the deduction will no longer be taken.
@dedpaid
Paid
This is a display only field showing amount paid to date.
You may not enter data into this field.
@stdate
Start
Enter the starting date for the deduction. This deduction
will not be taken until this date is reached.
!pyemp5
There are no entry fields on the fourth employee screen
because this screen is for displaying payment statistics
only.
@year
Year
This is the tax year to which this line was applied.
@paytype
Pay
This is the paycode for the source of this line. The code
varies according to the type and source of the transaction.
For instance, E = Earnings, D = Deductions, T = Taxes.
@taxauthority
Tax Authority
This is the code from the taxes table which corresponds to
the Tax Authority which assesses this tax.
@paycode
Pay Code
This is the code for the line under the cursor. This code
comes from the earnings code if it is an earnings line, the
deduction code for a deduction or the tax table for taxes.
@desc
Description
This is the description of the code.
@qtr1amt
Qtr1
If this is the current quarter, this is the accummulated
quarter-to-date total. If this is not the current quarter,
this is the Quarter-ending total.
@qtr2amt
Qtr2
If this is the current quarter, this is the accummulated
quarter-to-date total. If this is not the current quarter,
this is the Quarter-ending total.
@qtr3amt
Qtr3
If this is the current quarter, this is the accummulated
quarter-to-date total. If this is not the current quarter,
this is the Quarter-ending total.
@qtr4amt
Qtr4
If this is the current quarter, this is the accummulated
quarter-to-date total. If this is not the current quarter,
this is the Quarter-ending total.
@ytdamt
YTD
This is the accummulated year to date total for the current
year, or the year's total if not the current year.
!note
NOTES POPUP
===========
@note
Notes
While on any of the employee entry screens, you may also
enter notes about each employee. To enter notes press the
NOTE function key. When you press this key a popup notepad
screen will appear allowing you to enter as many note lines
as you wish. The notepad screen operates exactly like the
MULTI-RECORD entry screens. When you are finished entering
notes press the SAVE key to return to the employee entry
screen. %
request id is ljp-2019 (standard input)
1. HOW TO GET STARTED
1.1 Overview
This chapter describes the set up procedures for the Payroll
System. These procedures are performed only once when you
install your system.
This chapter contains the following sections:
How to Start the System
Setup System-Wide Control
Setup Payroll Control File
Setup Accounts
Setup Departments
Setup Earnings
Setup Deductions
Setup Taxes
Setup Employees
Backup Payroll Data
1.2 How to Start the System
To start the system type act at the command line and press
the RETURN key.
$ act
After you press RETURN the following AccountFlex Master Menu
will appear.
mmenu
The following sections describe the various setup choices
you will be using.
1.3 Setup System-wide Control File
The first file you need to configure is the System-wide
Control File. Parameters you define in this file will apply
throughout the entire accounting system.
To set up the System-wide Control File select option 8 on
the Master Menu. The System-wide Control File entry screen
will appear as follows.
sysfile
This screen has a number of entry fields which you fill in
with values appropriate to your installation. These fields
are described below.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press F1 to
save your entries and return to the Master Menu.
Below is a description of each parameter field.
Company Name
Enter the company name exactly as you want it to appear on
all printed reports and general ledger screens. Use up to 30
characters.
Company Address, Address2, City, State, Zip
Enter the company address. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
Company Telephone Number
Enter the company telephone number. You can use up to 15
characters.
Modules Installed
Enter the modules installed using Y=Yes or N=No.
Multiple Divisions (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple divisions, using Y=Yes or
N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the
fields to the right to specify divisional parameters.
Multiple Warehouses (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple warehouses, using Y=Yes
or N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access
the fields to the right to specify warehouse parameters.
Customer Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have customers with subsidiaries, using
Y=Yes or N=No. This feature will enable you to print
separate statements and trial balances for each subsidiary.
A subsidiary can represent a property, job, or location. If
you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the fields to
the right to specify additional customer subsidiary
parameters.
Vendor Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether your vendors have subsidiaries, using Y=Yes
or N=No. This feature will enable you to print separate
checks and trial balances for each subsidiary. A subsidiary
can represent a property, job, or location. If you enter "Y"
then you will be able to access the fields to the right to
specify additional vendor subsidiary parameters.
Account Code Format
Enter the account code format. You can use up to 12
characters including the delimiter. For example, entering
the following
Account: 3 3 0 0 Delimiter -
would result in G/L codes being formatted to NNN-NNN. The
following entry
Account: 3 0 0 0 Delimiter
would result in G/L codes being formatted to NNN.
Delimiter
Enter the delimiter to be used for the account code
described above. This is a one character field.
Code(s)
There are a number of codes for which you may specify the
justification (Customer Code, Vendor, Code, Employee Code,
etc.). Valid entries are "R" for Right justification or "L"
for Left justification. If you are using numeric codes you
should use right justification so that they will sort
properly. IMPORTANT: You may NOT change the justification
once data has been entered.
Inventory Costing Method
If you are using inventory you will need to specify the
costing method, using "R" for replacement, "S" for standard,
or "W" for weighted average. Replacement cost is the last
purchase price. Standard cost is a manually assigned cost.
Weighted average cost is an average cost calculated from
purchases.
1.4 Setup Payroll Control File
This section describes how to set up the payroll control
file. This control file is used for defining parameters that
apply throughout the Payroll System.
From the master menu, select option 6 to bring up the
Payroll menu. This menu will appear as follows.
pymenu
To set up the control file select the Enter Control option
on the Payroll menu. The Payroll control file screen will
appear as follows.
pyctl
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Payroll
menu.
The following describes each parameter field.
Multiple Departments (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple departments using Y=Yes
or N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access
the fields to the right to specify departmental parameters.
Payroll Bank Account
Enter the G/L account code representing your payroll
checking account.
Use accrual method when posting to G/L (Y/N)?
Enter 'Y' to use the accrual method or otherwise enter 'N'.
If you select 'N', the check posting program will create one
G/L batch file which will use the transaction date (or check
date) as the G/L period. The accrual method creates two G/L
batches for each check posting. One batch expenses wages,
employer taxes, and deductions using the ending pay date as
the G/L period. The other batch credits the cash account and
employee tax liability accounts using the transaction date
(or check date) as the G/L period.
Allow time card entry when editing checks (Y/N)?
Enter 'Y' to allow time card entry while in the edit check
program or otherwise enter 'N'. You will want to enter 'Y'
if employees work for more than one department durring a pay
period or you keeping track of work by job number.
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
Check Printer
Enter the default printer name which will be used to print
checks.
1.5 Setup G/L Accounts
This section describes how to set up your accounts. It is
important that your accounts be set up properly prior to
entering daily transactions.
The first step in setting up your accounts is to review the
existing accounts provided for you. To print the existing
accounts select the menu option Print Accounts. Upon making
this selection the Report Selection screen will appear as
follows:
glcoar
Once this screen appears enter "P" for the report
destination and then press the RUN function key to send the
report to the printer.
After the report has been run, press the ESCAPE key to
return to the menu.
Review the accounts on the report and determine if the
accounts meet your business needs. If changes or additions
are required, you will need to use the Enter Accounts menu
option.
To use the Account Entry screen, select the Enter Accounts
menu option. The Account Entry screen will appear as
follows.
glcoa
While on this screen you may change existing accounts or add
new ones as follows.
Change
To change an existing account position the cursor on the
account number using the arrow key. If the account is not on
the existing page, press the PREV (previous page) or NEXT
(next page) function key to find the account. Once your
cursor is positioned on the account, you may type over the
existing information.
Add
To add an account press the F4 key and the cursor will be
positioned on a blank line. Enter the new account code and
its associated information on this line. The data will be
saved when the SAVE key is pressed or you move the cursor
off the new account.
The following describes each field.
Account #
Enter the account number so that it is consistent with the
account code format specified in the System-Wide Control
File. You can use up to 12 characters including the
delimiters. If you are using the General Ledger Module be
sure to carefully choose your account codes because once
General Ledger transactions have been posted, you will NOT
be able to delete or change account Codes.
Description
Enter the account description as you would like it to appear
on your financial statements. You can use up to 30
characters.
Type & Subtype
Enter the account type and subtype. The possible account
types are:
Type Code
Assets A
Expenses E
Liabilities L
Income I
Capital C
The account type and subtype assigned to the General Ledger
account are discussed in the General Ledger User Guide in
Chapter 6 (Financial Reporting by Type).
Debit/Credit
Enter the debit/credit field. Valid entries are "D" for
debit or "C" for Credit.
Type Debit/Credit
Assets D
Expenses D
Liabilities C
Income C
Capital C
1.6 Setup Departments
This section describes how to set up your departments or
profit centers and assign them their respective G/L Account
Codes.
If you did NOT select the multiple departments option on the
payroll control file you will only be allowed to enter one
department.
To enter departmental account information, select the Enter
Departments option on the menu. The following screen will
appear.
pydiv
The Department entry screen consists of both a SINGLE-RECORD
and MULTI-RECORD portion. The SINGLE-RECORD portion
prompts for the department name and address. The
MULTI-RECORD portion prompts for the G/L account codes for
that department.
Below is a description of each field.
Department Screen (SINGLE-RECORD).
If you did NOT select the multiple department option on the
payroll control file you will bypass this portion and go
directly to the MULTI-RECORD portion
Department Code
Enter the Department Code.
Name
Enter the name for the department. You can use up to 20
characters.
Once the above data has been entered correctly, press the
SAVE function key to save the information and proceed to the
MULTI- RECORD portion.
Department Account Screen (MULTI-RECORD).
For each G/L account description you will enter the
appropriate G/L Account Code. These fields are described
below.
Description
This is the G/L Account Description.
Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file. Note that the payroll accrual account code is
only necessary if you are using the accrual method of
posting to the G/L. For further information lookup accrual
in the index.
1.7 Setup Earnings
This section describes how to set up your earnings. It is
important that the earnings table be set up properly prior
to entering pay checks.
The first step in setting up your earnings is to select the
Enter Earnings option from the menu. Upon making this
selection the earnings entry screen will appear as shown
below.
pyearn
Below is a description of each screen field.
Code
Enter the earning code to uniquely identify the earning
type.
Description
Enter the description of the earning.
Rate Factor
Enter the rate factor for the earning type. The rate factor
is used to determine premium rates of pay by multiplying
the rate factor times the normal pay rate.
amount = ratefactor X payrate X payunits (usually
hours)
A rate factor of 1 is assigned to regular earning, a rate
factors of 1.5 is usually assigned to overtime earning, and
a rate factor of 2 is usually assigned to doubletime. You
should leave the rate factor field blank if the earning t is
hours).
Incl Net?
Enter "Y" to include or "N" to exclude this earning from
the employee's net pay. Including or excluding this
earning from net pay does not affect taxable income.
Earnings may be excluded from taxable income by
specifying exclusion in the tax tables.
Fringe?
Enter "Y" if this fringe benefit must be reported in box 17
of the W-2 form.
1.8 Setup Deductions
This section describes how to set up your deductions. It is
important that the deductions table be set up properly prior
to entering pay checks.
The first step in setting up your deductions is to select
the Enter Deductions option from the menu. Upon making this
selection the deductions entry screen will appear as shown
below.
pyded
Below is a description of each screen field.
Deductions Code
Enter the deduction code to uniquely identify the deduction.
Description
Enter the description of the deduction.
G/L Account
Enter the G/L liability account for this deduction.
Non Qualified?
Enter "Y" if this is a nonqualified plan that should be
reported in box 16 of employees' W-2 forms, otherwise enter
"N".
Defer Comp?
Enter "Y" if this is deferred compensation that should be
reported in box 17 of employees' W-2 forms, otherwise enter
"N".
1.9 Setup Taxes
This section describes how to set up federal, state, and
local taxes as well as worker's compensation. In most cases
the tax tables will already be updated with the current
Federal and State taxes rates. Worker's Compensation,
however, will usually need to be updated with the job
classifications that apply to your company.
The first step in setting up your taxes is to select the
Enter Taxes option from the menu. Upon making this selection
the taxes entry screen will appear as shown below.
pytax
Below is a description of each screen field.
Tax Authority
Enter the tax authority or level of government to which the
tax is reported. This code is "FE" for federal, the state
code abbreviation for states, and your own two character
code for local.
Taxes Code
Enter the tax code to uniquely identify the tax. There are a
number of predefined tax codes which must not be changed.
These are:
Code Description
FWH Federal Withholding
FICA Employee's FICA
FIC2 Employer's FICA
MEDI Employee's Medicare
MED2 Employer's Medicare
FUTA Federal Unemployment
SDI State Disability
SUTA State Unemployment
WKCM State Worker's Compensation
Description
Enter the description of the tax.
Reporting Sequence
Enter a number to determine the order taxes will be printed
on reports and entry screens.
Tax ID Number
Enter the tax ID number that you want printed on the W-2
form. This field is only required where the tax code is
"FWH" or "SWH".
G/L Liability Account
Enter the G/L liability account for the tax.
Who Pays?
Enter "E" if the tax is paid by the employee or "C" it the
tax is paid by the Employer (or Company).
Minimum Wage
Enter the minimum wage on "SWH" tax records only.
Percent
Enter the percent of the tax. If the tax is not a fixed
percent leave this field blank. If left blank, later when
you press the SAVE function key a screen will appear for
entering a tax table. The tax table screen is described
below.
Maximum
If you entered a percent in the Percent field (see above)
and there is a maximum wage base, then enter the maximum
wage here.
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
If you did not enter a percent on the preceding tax screen
then you will automatically be switched to the tax table
screen upon pressing the
SAVE function key. The tax table screen will allow you to
enter percentages that vary with income.
The tax table screen will appear as follows:
pytaxt
Below is a description of each field on the tax table
screen.
Tax Authority
The tax authority and its description will appear here.
Taxes Code
The tax code and its description will appear here.
Tax Status
Enter the tax status (M=Married, S=Single, H=Head of
House, etc). A tax table may be specified for each status.
All tax status codes assigned to employees must be defined
here.
Description
Enter the description of the tax status.
Before Tax Allowance
Enter the allowance per exemption that will substracted from
the taxable income before determining tax.
After Tax Allowance
Enter the allowance per exemption that will substracted from
the tax.
Base
Enter a tax amount for income not exceeding the the amount
specified in Amt Over screen field (see below).
Percent
Enter the tax percent that will be applied for income
exceeding the amount specified in "Amt Over" (see below).
Amt Over
Enter an amount for use by the above two fields.
If you entered the Worker's Compensation code (WKCM) as the
tax code on the tax screen, you will automatically be
switched to the Worker's Compensation screen upon pressing
the SAVE function key. The Worker's Compensation screen will
allow you to enter tax percentages for each job
classification.
The Worker's Compensation screen will appear as follows:
pytaxw
Below is a description of each field on the Worker's
Compensation screen.
Tax Authority
The tax authority and its description will appear here.
Taxes Code
The tax code and its description will appear here.
Overtime Premium Exempt?
Enter "Y" if overtime premium should not be included in
Worker's Compensation taxable income.
Class
Enter the job classification code(s) used by your company.
Each employee must be assigned a job classification code and
all of these codes must be defined here. You may specify up
to 12 different job classifications.
Rate/$100
Enter the rate per $100 dollars of income.
1.10 Setup Employees
This section describes how to set up your employees. It is
important that your employees be setup properly prior to
entering pay checks.
The first step in setting up your employees is to select the
Enter Employee option from the menu. Upon making this
selection the first of four employee screens will appear as
shown below.
pyemp1
While on this first screen you may ADD a new Employee or
CHANGE existing ones. The following two subsections describe
how to ADD or CHANGE.
ADD
To ADD a new employee press the ADD function key (F4) to
switch the screen to ADD mode. You will know whether you are
in ADD mode by the mode message that appears at the top of
the screen. Once in ADD mode, the first field you will enter
is the employee code. Your employee code will identify the
employee throughout the system. After entering the employee
code, press the RETURN key to enter the next field on the
screen. When you have filled in all of the employee fields,
press the SAVE function key to save the employee
information. Upon pressing the SAVE key the screen will
clear and make itself ready for the next employee addition.
CHANGE
To CHANGE an existing employee first be sure you are in
CHANGE mode by pressing the CHG function key (F4) if
necessary. You will know whether you are in CHANGE mode by
the mode message that appears at the top of the screen. Once
you are in CHANGE mode, enter the employee code you wish to
locate and press the RETURN key. The employee information
will then be displayed and you may cursor to any field
(except the employee code) and change its contents. If you
would like to search for employees by name, you may do so by
pressing the SRCH function key. The Search function is
described in Chapter 2. After you have made all of the
changes you wish, press the
SAVE function key to save the changes.
Below is a description of each screen field on the first
employee screen
Employee Code
Enter the employee code to identify the employee in the
system.
Soc. Sec. No.
Enter the employee's social security number.
Name(Last,Middle,First)
Enter the employee's last name, middle initial, and first
name.
Address
Enter the employee's home address.
City
Enter the employee's home city.
State
Enter the employee's home state.
Zip
Enter the employee's home zip code.
Phone
Enter the employee's home phone number.
Contact
Enter person to contact in case of emergency.
Phone
Enter phone number of emergency contact.
Sex
Enter "M" for male and "F" for female.
EEO
Enter Equal Opportunity classification: 1=White, 2=Black,
3=Hispanic, 4=Asian, 5=Indian.
Drivers License
Enter the employee's driver's license number.
Expire
Enter the employee's driver's license expiration date.
INS No
Enter Imigration Work Permit Number.
Expire
Enter Imigration Work Permit Expiration.
Birth
Enter birth date.
Hire
Enter hire date.
Promotion
Enter last promotion date.
Termination
Enter termination date.
Rehirable(Y/N)
Enter whether employee is rehirable (Y=Yes, N=No).
Department
Enter Department Code (press HELP key to see code list).
Upon pressing the SAVE function while on the first employee
screen, you will automatically be switched to the second
employee screen.
The second employee screen will appear as follows.
pyemp2
Below is a description of each field on the second employee
screen.
Pay Type
Enter U=Units, S=Salary, or C=Commission. You will enter
"U" for hourly and piece work employees.
Rate/Salary
Enter rate of pay per unit (usually hours) for employee's
with a pay type of "U" (Unit) or enter a salary amount for
employee's with a pay type of "S" (Salaried).
Normal Units
Enter normal number of units (usually hours) worked per pay
period.
Pay Group
When generating checks, you use the group code to identify
the employees you want to pay. We recommend using different
group codes for different pay cycles such as D=Daily,
W=Weekly, B=Bi-weekly, S=Semi-monthly, M=Monthly,
Q=Quarterly, A=Annually.
Pay Periods
Enter number of times this employee will be paid per year
(ex. monthly=12,weekly=52). This number is important for
calculating taxes.
FICA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employee is exempt from Social Security Tax.
FUTA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employer is exempt from Federal Unemployment
Tax.
SUTA(Y/N)
Enter "Y" if employer is exempt from State Unemployment
Tax.
Workers Compensation Class
Enter Worker's Compensation Class Code (or blank for
exempt).
Federal Tax Authority
This field is automatically assigned "FE" which stands for
federal authority.
Federal Status
Enter Federal tax status code using M=Married or S=Single.
Federal #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
Federal Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular Federal
withholding.
Federal Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular Federal
withholding.
State Tax Authority
Enter State Tax Authority. This is normally the two
character state code (CA=California, WA=Washington, etc.).
State Status
Enter State tax status code (M=married, S=Single, H=Head
of House).
State #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
State Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular State
withholding.
State Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular State
withholding.
Local Tax Authority
Enter Local Tax Authority.
Local Status
Enter Local tax status code (I.E. M=married, S=Single).
Local #Exemptions
Enter number of exemptions claimed on W-4 or 99 for no
withholding.
Local Extra Withhold
Enter amount to withhold in addition to regular Local
withholding.
Local Fixed Withhold
Enter amount to withhold instead of regular Local
withholding.
EIC Status
Enter EIC tax status code using "1" for employee filing or
"2" for both employee and spouse filing.
Vacation Avail
Number of vacation days available.
Vacation Start
Enter the date when vacation time will begin accruing.
Vacation Rate
Enter rate for accrual of vacation days.
Vacation per
Rate is based on either U=Unit(hour) or P=Pay Period.
Personal Avail
Number of personal days available.
Personal Start
Enter the date when personal time will begin accruing.
Personal Rate
Enter rate for accrual of personal days.
Personal per
Rate is based on either U=Unit(hour) or P=Pay Period.
Sick Leave Avail
Number of sick days available.
Sick Start
Enter the date when sick time will begin accruing.
Sick Rate
Enter rate for accrual of sick hours.
Sick per
Rate is based on either U=Unit(hour) or P=Pay Period.
If you press the SAVE function key, you will automatically
be switched to the third employee screen. The third employee
screen will appear as follows.
pyemp3
Below is a description of each field on the third employee
screen.
Deduction
Enter deduction code (Press HELP key to see list). The
deduction description will automatically appear upon
entering the code.
Deduct Periods
This field is used to schedule the deduction. Each character
position of this 12 character field represents a deduction
period. You signify whether the deduction will be taken by
entering a blank, "Y", or "N" in the period's character
position. Blank or "Y" indicate the deduction is to be taken
and "N" indicates it is not. If a deduction is taken on
every pay check you would leave this field blank. To specify
a deduction that is taken in periods 1, 3, and 7 type:
YNYNNNYNNNNN
This field comes into play during check generation. The
deduction period you enter prior to check generation will be
checked against this field to determine whether to take the
deduction.
Type
Enter deduction amount type (A=Amount, P=Percent,
R=Rate).
Amount
Enter deduction amount (amount, rate, or percent depending
on your answer to the Type screen field).
Maximum
Enter maximum amount for deduction. Once the maximum is
reached, the deduction will no longer be taken.
Paid
This is a display only field showing amount paid to date.
You may not enter data into this field.
Start
Enter the starting date for the deduction. This deduction
will not be taken until this date is reached.
While on the third employee screen, if you press the SAVE
function key, you will automatically be switched to the
fourth employee screen. The fourth employee screen will
appear as follows.
pyemp4
There are no entry fields on the fourth employee screen
because this screen is for displaying payment statistics
only.
While on any of the employee entry screens, you may also
enter notes about each employee. To enter notes press the
NOTE function key. When you press this key a popup notepad
screen will appear allowing you to enter as many note lines
as you wish. The notepad screen operates exactly like the
MULTI-RECORD entry screens. When you are finished entering
notes press the SAVE key to return to the employee entry
screen.
1.11 Print Employees Account
This section discusses how to print your Employees Account.
The first step in reviewing your Employees Account is to
select the Print Employee option on the menu. Upon making
this selection the Report Selection screen will appear.
pyempr1
When this screen appears enter "P" for the report
destination and then press the RUN function key to send the
report to the printer. The Employee Table Listing will
appear as shown below.
pyempr1
Review the Employee Accounts for completeness and if any
additions or changes need to be made, select the Enter
Employee option on the menu.
After selecting the report you may press the ESCAPE key to
return to the menu.
1.12 Backup Data Base
Once you have set up all of your modules, you should backup
you database.
To backup your database, select option 10 on the Master
Menu.
2. OPERATIONS/REFERENCE SECTION
2.1 Overview
This chapter provides detailed instructions on how to
operate each Payroll function. Each section within this
chapter covers a specific menu option. The sections are in
the same order as the menu options on the Payroll menu.
The Payroll menu appears as follows.
pymenu
2.2 Generate Checks
This section describes how to generate checks. Generating
checks will create a batch of checks based on the
information you provided for each employee. Once generated,
you will be given an opportunity to override information on
the checks prior to printing.
To generate checks select option 1 on the Payroll menu. The
generate checks screen will appear as shown below.
pygenp
Press the SAVE key to begin Generating or Press the ESCAPE
key to EXIT.
Below is a description of each screen field.
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code you would like to generate checks for.
This is a required field and refers to the pay group code
you assigned to each employee record.
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period no deductions
will be taken on the checks.
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range you would like to have printed on
the checks. The range should be the beginning and ending
dates that the work was performed.
Date on Check
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the checks.
Employee Code
Enter an employee code you would like to generate a check
for. If you do not enter an employee code, the program will
generate checks for all employees belonging to the above pa
group code. The employee code must exist in the employee
table. You may press the HELP function key to see a list
valid entries.
As the generation takes place, the screen fields will
display the following data.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. Two passes will take place: pass 1 verifies
the data and pass 2 generates the checks.
Employee
The employee number that is currently being processed will
be displayed here.
When the checks have been generated you will see the
following message:
Check generation has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Payroll menu.
2.3 Edit Checks
This section describes the process of editing generated
checks or entering manual checks into your Payroll program.
Time cards may also be entered via this menu choice.
To edit or enter checks select option 2 on the Payroll menu.
The check screen will appear as follows:
pychk
Below is a description of each screen field.
Check Screen (SINGLE-RECORD)
Employee Code
The employee code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the employee table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
Pay Group Code
This is a display-only field showing the pay group code
assigned to this employee.
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period there will be
no automatic deductions taken on checks.
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range you would like to have printed on
the check. The range should be the beginning and ending
dates work was performed.
Check No.
For manual checks you assign a check number in this field.
If this field is left blank, the check will be automatically
assigned a check number and printed by the Print Checks
routine (which is discussed in a subsequent section). This
field allows a maximum of ten alphanumeric characters.
Check Date
Enter the issue date you would like printed on the check.
Dept
This is a display-only field showing the department code
assigned to this employee.
EARNINGS
Enter an earning code. When the earning code is entered the
system will replace the code with its description.
Hrs/U
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for units). The
system will automatically calculate the pay amount based on
the employee's rate which is shown in the lower left hand
corner of the screen. The calculated pay amount will be
displayed under the column Current located to the right of
this field. After entering earning amounts, you should press
the CALC function key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
Current
You will enter the current pay amount if the earning code
does not have a rate factor assigned to it or the employee
has a pay type of "S" (which stands for salaried). After
entering earning amounts, you should press the CALC function
key to recalculate deductions and taxes.
DEDUCTIONS
Enter a deduction code. When you enter the deduction code,
the system will replace the code with its description.
Current
Enter the deduction amount or override the calculated
deduction amount. You may also press the CALC function key
to recalculate deduction and tax amounts.
TAXES
Enter a tax code. Upon entering the tax code the system will
replace the code with its description.
Current
Enter the tax amount or override the calculated tax amount.
Rate
This is a display-only field showing the pay rate or salary
amount assigned to this employee. For hourly employees, the
payment amount will be calculated by multiplying this rate
times the hours worked.
CUR Earn
This is a display-only field showing the total earnings for
this pay check.
CUR Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the total deductions
and taxes for this pay check.
CUR NET
This is a display-only field showing the total net amount
for this pay check. The net amount is equal to the total
earnings minus the total of the deductions and taxes.
YTD Earn
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
earnings.
YTD Deduct
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date
deductions and taxes.
YTD NET
This is a display-only field showing the year-to-date net
amount. The year-to-date net amount is equal to the year-to-
date earnings minus the total of the year-to-date deductions
and year-to-date taxes.
The check screen has a number of special function keys each
of which is described below:
CALC
This function key is used to recalculate deductions and
taxes based on the currently displayed check information.
SKIP
This function key enables you to jump the cursor from one
screen section to another.
TIME
This function key brings up the Time Card entry screen. For
this key to be active you must have answered "Y" to multiple
departments in the payroll control file and "Y" to job cost
in the system-wide control file. This screen will enable yo
enter a time, rate, department, and job number for each ear
activity. A detailed description of this screen is provided
end of this section.
EMPL
This function key brings up the employee entry screens for
viewing or making changes.
GEN
This function key may only be used in ADD mode and allows
you to generate a check like the Generate Checks menu
selection. The difference is that this check generation
routine only generates one check at a time. When you press
this function key a popup will appear asking you for
information similarly to the Generated Checks menu choice.
You should enter the information on the popup and then press
the SAVE function key to generate the check. To exit the
popup without generating a check, you should press the
ESCAPE key.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save information on the check screen.
For those using time card entry, the following screen will
appear upon pressing the TIME function key.
pychk2
Below is a description of each screen field.
Time Card Entry Screen (SINGLE-RECORD)
Earning Code
Enter the earning code. This code must exist in the earning
code table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
Dept
Enter the department number. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries. This prompt
will only appear if you selected multiple departments on the
payroll control file.
Job
Enter the job number.
Rate
You will enter a rate if the earning code has a rate factor
assigned to it and the employee has a pay type of "U" or
unit pay. Otherwise enter a payment amount. If you enter a
payment amount, this amount will be displayed under the
column Total located to the right of this field.
Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for unit pay).
The system will automatically calculate the pay amount based
on the employee's pay rate. The calculated pay amount will
be displayed under the column Total located to the right of
this field.
Total
This is a display-only field showing the payment amount for
the earning line.
2.4 Print Payroll
This section describes how to print the payroll report so
that errors can be discovered and corrected prior to
printing checks. Printing checks will be discussed in the
next section.
To print the payroll report select option 3, and the Report
Selection screen will be displayed as shown below.
pychkr1
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill with appropriate values. When you are sure all your
entries are correct press the RUN function key to run the
payroll report.
Below is a description of each screen field.
The first 4 fields are standard on the Report Selection
screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Employee Code
Enter the employee code you would like to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print checks
for all employees. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code you would like to print. If you do not
enter a group code, the program will print all checks.
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range you want the report to include. If
you do not enter a pay date range, the program will print
all checks.
Check Date
Enter the check date you would like to print. If you do not
enter a check date, the program will print all checks.
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the Payroll Report as shown below.
pychkr1
When the report is complete then press the ESCAPE key to
return to the Payroll menu.
2.5 Print Checks
This section discusses how to print checks.
Select the Print Checks menu option 4 and the Report
Selection screen will appear as shown below.
pychkw
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to complete with appropritate values.
Below is a description of each screen field.
The first field is standardized on the Report Selection
screen, and are described in Chapter 2 General Operational
Procedures.
Employee Code
Enter the employee code for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter an employee code, the program
will print all checks. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a group code, the program will
print all checks.
Pay Date Range
Enter the pay date range for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a pay date range, the program
will print all checks.
Check Date
Enter the check date for which you would like to print
checks. If you do not enter a check date, the program will
print all checks.
Print Check Number Range
Enter the check number range that you want to assign to the
printed checks. The program will assign these check numbers
to all checks within the batch that do not already have a
check number assigned to them. You must enter a beginning
range for check numbers to be assigned.
VOID Check Number Range
Enter the check number range that you want to VOID. The
program will VOID these checks numbers and enter the VOID
checks into the Check Register. You will want to use this
option if checks were destroyed due to a paper jam or paper
misalignment.
If some of the checks are damaged, for example checks
282-283 of the check run 275-285, you may VOID and reprint
the damaged checks only or VOID and reprint all checks
starting with 282.
To VOID and reprint just the damaged checks you would enter
the following:
Print Check Number Range:[ 286] to [ 287]
VOID Check Number Range:[ 282] to [ 283]
The program will reprint checks 282-283 as 286-287. Checks
282-283 will be assigned a VOID status in the Check
Register.
To VOID and reprint ALL checks starting with the damaged
check 282 you would enter the following:
Print Check Number Range:[ 286] to [ ]
VOID Check Number Range:[ 282] to [ ]
The program will reprint checks starting with 282 using
check numbers starting with 286. Pre-existing checks
starting with 282 will be assigned a VOID status in the
Check Register.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the RUN
function key to print the checks.
A sample of the printed checks is shown below:
pychkw
2.6 Post Checks
This section describes how to Post your checks to the
history file and General Ledger. It is important that your
checks be correctly entered before posting. This is because
modified.
To post checks select option 5 on the Payroll menu. The
Payroll Checks Posting screen will appear as shown below.
pychkp
You may press the SAVE function key to begin posting or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the Data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the check will be displayed here.
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
Employee
The employee code being posted will be displayed here.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Payroll menu.
2.7 Print Check Journal
This section describes how to print the Posting Journal
Report. This report will print the posted checks which must
match the Payroll report printed prior to posting.
To print the Posting Journal select option 6 on the Payroll
menu. The Report Selection screen will appear as shown
below.
pychkpr1
Below is a description of each entry field.
The first 4 fields are standard on the Report Selection
Screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Post No.
The post number field is for viewing only.
Check Number Range
Enter the range of check numbers you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check number range, the program will
print all checks.
Check Date Range
Enter the range of check dates you would like to print. If
you do not enter an check date range, the program will print
all checks.
Employee Range
Enter the range of employee codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a employee range, the program will print
all checks.
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the Payroll Check Posting Journal
Report as shown below.
pychkpr1
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Payroll menu.
2.8 Print G/L Journal
This menu option (7) is for printing the G/L distributions
for the check posting. For this option to work, the
system-wide control file parameter for General Ledger must
be set to "Y".
Selecting the menu option to print G/L distributions will
displayed.
pyglr1
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the RUN function key to run
the report.
Below is a description of each screen field.
The first 3 fields are standard on the Report Selection
screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
When you are satisfied with your entries, press the RUN
function key to generate the report. The report will appear
as follows.
pyglr1
Note that the check posting program will create accrual
batches or non-accrual batches depending on your answer to
the payroll control file parameter for accrual. For a
further explanation about accrual vs. non-accrual, refer to
the information provided for this control file parameter in
Chapter 3.
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Payroll menu.
2.9 Payroll Quarterly Reports
This menu option (13) is for reporting quarterly payroll
information.
Upon selecting this option, the following popup menu will
appear for choosing the type of quarterly report.
1. Summary
2. by Employee
After you choose the report type, the report selection
screen will appear as follows.
pyempyr1
When you are satisfied with your entries, press the RUN
function key to generate the report. The report will appear
as follows.
pyempyr1
2.10 Payroll History Reports
This menu option (14) is for reporting history payroll
information.
Upon selecting this option, the following popup menu will
appear for choosing the type of history report.
1. Summary
2. by Employee
After you have choose the report type, the report selection
screen will appear as follows.
pyhisr1
When you are satisfied with your entries, press the RUN
function key to generate the report. The report will appear
as follows.
pyhisr1
2.11 Check Register
This section describes how to print your Check Register.
Select Check Register option 15 and the Report Selection
screen will appear as shown below.
pyhisr10
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to complete with appropriate values.
Below is a description of each screen field.
The first 4 fields are standard on the Report Selection
screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Check Number Range
Enter the check number range that you want to print. If you
do not enter a check number range, the program will print
all checks by default. You may press the HELP function key
to see a list of valid entries.
Check Date Range
Enter the check date range that you want to print. All
checks will print that have a Check date between the
specified range. If you do not enter a date range, the
program will print all checks by default.
Employee Code
Enter the employee code that you want to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print all
checks by default. This code must exist in the employee
table. You may press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the RUN
function key to run the Check Register report as shown
below.
pyhisr10
Once the report is complete then press the ESCAPE key to
return to the Payroll menu.
2.12 940-EZ Report
This section describes how to print the Federal Report
940-EZ.
To print this report select option 16 on the Payroll menu.
The Report Selection screen will appear as shown below.
py940ez
Below is a description of each entry field.
The first 2 fields are standard on the Report Selection
Screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Year
Enter the year for which you would like to print the 940EZ
report.
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the 940-EZ Report. A sample of this
report is shown below.
py940ez
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Payroll menu.
2.13 941 Report
This section describes how to print the Federal Report 941.
To print this report select option 17 on the Payroll menu.
The Report Selection screen will appear as shown below.
py941
Below is a description of each entry field.
The first 2 fields are standard on the Report Selection
Screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Quarter
Enter the quarter for which you would like a 941 report.
Year
Enter the year for which you would like a 941 report.
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the 941 Report. A sample report is
shown below.
py941
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Payroll menu.
2.14 W-2 Report
This section describes how to print the Federal W2 forms.
To print this report select option 18 on the Payroll menu.
The Report Selection screen will appear as shown below.
pyw2
Below is a description of each entry field.
The first 3 fields are standard on the Report Selection
Screen, and are described in Chapter 2, General Operational
Procedures.
Year
Enter the year you would like the 941 report.
Employee Range
Enter the range of employee codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter an employee range, the program will
print all employees.
When you are sure all of your entries are correct, press the
RUN function key to run the W2 Report as shown below.
pyw2
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Payroll menu.
2.15 Magnetic Media
2.16 Enter Employee
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.17 Print Employee
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.18 Enter Accounts
This section is discussed in Chapter 3, How to Get Started.
2.19 Print Accounts
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.20 Enter Departments
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.21 Print Departments
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.22 Enter Earnings
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.23 Print Earnings
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.24 Enter Deductions
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.25 Print Deductions
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.26 Enter Taxes
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.27 Print Taxes
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.28 Enter Control
This menu option is described in Chapter 3, How to Get
Started.
2.29 Purge
This section describes the process of Purging Data from the
Payroll system.
To Purge Data, select option 38 on the Payroll menu. The
Payroll Purge screen will appear as shown below.
pypurge
Press the SAVE key to begin PURGING or press the ESCAPE key
to EXIT. Please make a note of the instructions displayed on
the screen.
Below is a description of each screen field.
Last Purge Date
This is a display-only field that displays the last date
used to purge.
New Purge Date
Enter the new purge date. All checks paid prior to this date
will be purged.
As the Purging takes place, the screen fields will display
the following information:
Employee
The employee number that is currently being processed will
be displayed here.
When the Purging has been completed you will see the
following message:
Purging has been Successfully Completed
Once this message appears you may press the ESCAPE key to
return to the Payroll menu.
act/help/slbokrs.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005243 05165726411 014505 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY SALESMAN,ITEM,ORDER DATE
============================================
This menu option is for booking report by
salesman,item,order date This screen has a number of entry
fields which you will need to fill in with appropriate
values. When you are sure all your entries are correct,
press the RUN funtion key to run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slhisrw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005234 05165726412 014522 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES HISTORY REPORT BY WAREHOUSE, ITEM, INVOICE
================================================
This menu option is for sales history report by warehouse
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slbokrw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005247 05165726411 014515 0 ustar infoflex users !select
BOOKINGS REPORT BY WAREHOUSE,ITEM,ORDER DATE
===============================================
This menu option is for booking report by
warehouse,item,order date This screen has a number of entry
fields which you will need to fill in with appropriate
values. When you are sure all your entries are correct,
press the RUN funtion key to run the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@orddate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@orddate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whsno1
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/apend.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000275 05165726362 014122 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@mondate
Enter last month-end run date.
@yeardate
Enter last year-end run date.
@a
Run month-end , year-end , or both (M,Y,B).
@venno
Enter vendor code.
act/help/pyinvr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002630 05165726406 014437 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R INVOICE BATCH LISTING
=========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Enter the begining A/R invoices number you want to print.
@invno2
Enter the ending A/R invoices number you want to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/ardiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003623 05165726366 014144 0 ustar infoflex users !ardiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
%
%
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the name for the division. You can use up to 20
characters.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@city
Division City
Enter the city for the division.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/aradjpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003562 05165726365 014544 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R ADJUSTMENT POSTING JOURNAL
==============================
This section describes how to print the Posting Journal
Report. This report will print the posted adjustment batches
which must match with the batch report printed prior to
posting.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No.
Enter post number you would like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the range of customer codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a customer range the computer will
print all customers.
act/help/pyhisr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001727 05165726406 014434 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL HISTORY REPORT (Summary)
================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning check date of the range that you wish to
be included in the report. This is a required entry.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the lastcheck date of the range that you wish to be
included in the report. This is a required entry.
act/help/pyhisr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002545 05165726406 014434 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL HISTORY REPORT (Employee)
=================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@trandat1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning check date of the range that you wish to
be included in the report. This is a required entry.
@trandat2
Ending Check Date
Enter the lastcheck date of the range that you wish to be
included in the report. This is a required entry.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code you would like to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will include all
employees. The employee code must exist in the employee
table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of valid
entries.
@paytype
Pay Type
Enter a select pay type. If no pay type is selected, all
pay types will be reported.
act/help/arcus.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007437 10001647660 014143 0 ustar infoflex users !arcus
CUSTOMER ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
@cusno
Customer Code
Enter the customer code to identify the customer in the
system.
@company
Customer Name
Enter the customer company name for billing and shipping.
@name
Customer Name
Enter the customer name for billing. If personal name
enter as lastname, firstname.
@address1
Address - Line 1
Enter the first line of the customer's address.
@address2
Address - Line 2
Enter the second line of the customer's address
@city
City
Enter the customer address for billing and shipping.
@state
State
Enter the state for billing and shipping address.
@zip
Zip
Enter the Zip Code for the billing and shipping address.
@tx
Tax Code
Enter the Tax Code to represent the tax schedule for that
customer.
@sl
Sales Representative
Enter the Sales Representative representing that customer.
@contact
Contact Person
Enter the contact person in this field.
@phone
Telephone Number
Enter the telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@fax
Fax Telephone Number
Enter the Fax number for the customer.
@resale
Resale License Number
Enter the Resale Number for the customer.
@m
Method of Payment
Enter the method of payments applied "O" for Open Item, "B"
for Balance Forward.
@f
Finance Charge (Y/N)
Indicate if finance charges will be billed to the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, and "N" for No.
@i
Invoices Printed (Y/N)
Indicate if invoices will be produced for the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, and "N" for No.
@s
Statements Printed (Y/N/S)
Indicate if statements will be produced for the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, "N" for No, and "S" to print
seperate statements for each subsidiary.
@tm
Terms Code
Enter the Terms Code for that customer. You may press the
HELP function key for a list of valid entries.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
for this customer.
@cred
Credit Code
Enter the credit code of the customer.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
Enter the credit limit for the customer.
@curbalance
Current Balance
This field displays the current balance.
!slship
Ship To Popup
=============
@shp
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipname
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@ht
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
act/help/slgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003157 05165726412 014141 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Order Entry/Sales
The AccountFlex Order Entry/Sales module handles all the accounting
and record keeping functions necessary to effectively manage order
processing within you company.
Below are some of its features:
* Processes regular, standing, and future orders, invoices
and/or credit memos.
(more)
* Prints order confirmations, picking slips, invoices, credit
memos, and shipping labels.
* Handles mixed units of measure or fractional quantities.
* Calculates taxes automatically.
* Checks credit limit at order entry time.
* Maintains unlimited ship-to addresses per customer.
(more)
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as customer
balances, order history, etc..
* Supports multiple divisions.
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes (i.e. customer
code, invoice number, etc.).
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
(more)
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/poinvpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003521 05165726400 014577 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
P/O INVOICE POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
This menu option is for p/o invoice posting journal.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Begining Invoice Number
Enter the begining purchase order invoice number you want to
print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending purchase order invoice number you want to
print.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/arpurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001122 05165726367 014475 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@ipurdate
Purge Date for Paid Invoices
New Purge Date
Enter the New Purge Date. All invoices paid prior to this
date will be purged.
@rpurdate
Purge Check Register
New purge check register date.
Enter new purge date. All invoices paid prior to this date
will be purge.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter beginning of customerr range.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending of customer range. If you do not enter a
range the computer will default and print all customers.
These codes must exist in the vendor table.
act/help/apopen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004623 05165726362 014316 0 ustar infoflex users !apopen
A/P INVOICE INQUIRY
====================
This section describes the Inquire Invoice History screen.
With this screen, you can view invoices and their detail.
You will NOT be allowed to make changes while on this
screen.
When the screen appears, enter the Invoice and vendor you
would like to view. The information about this invoice will
immediately appear.
To view the list of transactions (invoices, adjustments, and
receipts) for this invoice, press the SAVE function key. The
transactions will be displayed in the MULTI-RECORD portion
of the screen. While on the Transaction portion of the
screen you may press the ZOOM key in order to display detail
information about any transaction that the cursor is
positioned on. The Transaction Detail screen will ap
follows.
@invno
Invoice Number
Enter invoice number you would like to print.
@cusno
Customer ID Number
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the system.
@trandate
Enter transaction date.
@m
The source of the invoice will be displayed here.
@batch
The batch number that is created while copying will
be displayed here.
@discdate
Discount date will be displayed here.
@discallow
Discount allow will be displayed here.
@duedate
Due date will be displayed here.
@description
Description of items will be displayed here.
@poordno
po#
Enter purchase order number.
@atrandat
Transaction Date
Enter latest transaction date.
@cusno
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the
system.
@invno
Invoice Number
The invoice number for this item.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The Invoice Date.
@description
Description
Description of the invoice, if any given.
@amountdue
Amount Due
The balance still owed on the invoice.
@artrandat
Transaction Date
The Transaction date for this open invoice.
@M
Module
The module which generated this invoice.
@S
Source
The source of this invoice.
@BATCH
Batch
This is the batch number from which this invoice was posted.
@adescription
Description
This is the description of this invoice.
@adiscount
Discount
This is the amount of discount available for this invoice.
@aamount
Amount
This is the balance due on this invoice.
!apdist
@glcode
G/L Account Code
This is the G/L account code this distribution posted to.
@amount
Amount
This is the amount of the distribution.
act/help/pytax.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000014331 05165726406 014175 0 ustar infoflex users !pytax1
TAX ENTRY SCREEN
================
@au
Tax Authority
Enter the tax authority or level of government to which the
tax is reported. This code is "FE" for federal, the state
code abbreviation for states, and your own two character
code for local.
@authdesc
Authority Description
Enter a description of the tax authority being added.
@code
Taxes Code
Enter the tax code to uniquely identify the tax. There are a
number of predefined tax codes which must not be changed.
These are:
@codedesc
Code Description
FWH Federal Withholding
FICA Employee's FICA
FIC2 Employer's FICA
MEDI Employee's Medicare
MED2 Employer's Medicare
FUTA Federal Unemployment
SDI State Disability
SUTA State Unemployment
WKCM State Worker's Compensation
@seq
Reporting Sequence
Enter a number to determine the order taxes will be printed
on reports and entry screens.
@taxid
Tax ID Number
Enter the tax ID number that you want printed on the W-2
form. This field is only required where the tax code is
"FWH" or "SWH".
@glcode
G/L Liability Account
Enter the G/L liability account for the tax.
@w
Who Pays?
Enter "E" if the tax is paid by the employee or "C" it the
tax is paid by the Employer (or Company).
@minwage
Minimum Wage
Enter the minimum wage on "SWH" tax records only.
@percent
Percent
Enter the percent of the tax. If the tax is not a fixed
percent leave this field blank. If left blank, later when
you press the SAVE function key a screen will appear for
entering a tax table. The tax table screen is described
below.
@maximum
Maximum
If you entered a percent in the Percent field (see above)
and there is a maximum wage base, then enter the maximum
wage here.
@e1
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d1
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e2
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d2
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e3
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d3
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e4
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d4
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e5
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d5
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e6
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d6
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e7
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d7
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@e8
Earnings Excluded
Enter the earning codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
@d8
Deductions Excluded
Enter the deduction codes you wish excluded from taxable
income. You may enter up to 8 earning codes.
!pytaxtable
TAX TABLE SCREEN
================
%
If you did not enter a percent on the preceding tax screen
then you will automatically be switched to the tax table
screen upon pressing the SAVE function key. The tax table
screen will allow you to enter percentages that vary with
income.
@au
Tax Authority
The tax authority and its description will appear here.
@code
Taxes Code
The tax code and its description will appear here.
@s
Tax Status
Enter the tax status (M=Married, S=Single, H=Head of
House, etc). A tax table may be specified for each status.
All tax status codes assigned to employees must be defined
here.
@statusdesc
Description
Enter the description of the tax status.
@allowance
Before Tax Allowance
Enter the allowance per exemption that will substracted from
the taxable income before determining tax.
@allowance2
After Tax Allowance
Enter the allowance per exemption that will substracted from
the tax.
@base1
Base
Enter a tax amount for income not exceeding the the amount
specified in Amt Over screen field (see below).
@percent1
Percent
Enter the tax percent that will be applied for income
exceeding the amount specified in "Amt Over" (see below).
@over1
Amt Over
Enter an amount for use by the above two fields.
If you entered the Worker's Compensation code (WKCM) as the
tax code on the tax screen, you will automatically be
switched to the Worker's Compensation screen upon pressing
the SAVE function key. The Worker's Compensation screen will
allow you to enter tax percentages for each job
classification.
The Worker's Compensation screen will appear as follows:
!pytaxwkcm
WORK'S COMPENSATION SCREEN
==========================
@au
Tax Authority
The tax authority and its description will appear here.
@code
Taxes Code
The tax code and its description will appear here.
@o
Overtime Premium Exempt?
Enter "Y" if overtime premium should not be included in
Worker's Compensation taxable income.
@cd1
Class
Enter the job classification code(s) used by your company.
Each employee must be assigned a job classification code and
all of these codes must be defined here. You may specify up
to 12 different job classifications.
@rate1
Rate/$100
Enter the rate per $100 dollars of income.
act/help/inwrkr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005757 05165726377 014367 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PHYSICAL COUNT WORKSHEET
========================
This menu option is for usage physical count worksheet
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@qtyflag
Print Quantities?
Enter "N" if you do not wish the quantity on hand to show on
the counting sheet. The default is "Y".
@serialflag
Print Serialized Items
Enter "Y" if you wish to include the item numbers for
serialized items on the counting sheet. The default is "N"
which excludes those items from the counting sheets.
act/help/inreorg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007265 05165726375 014512 0 ustar infoflex users !select
REORDER REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM
=============================
This menu option is for reorder report by group,item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/inreori.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007242 05165726375 014507 0 ustar infoflex users !select
REORDER REPORT BY ITEM
======================
This menu option is for reorder report by ,item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/glsub.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000514 05165726372 014144 0 ustar infoflex users !glsub
ASSIGN SUBTYPES TO ACCOUNTS
===========================
@t
Account Type
Enter type you would like to assign to accounts.
@s
Account Subtype
Enter subtype you would like to assign to accounts.
@desc
Subtype Description
Enter description of items.
@catdesc
Type description will be displayed here.
act/help/inreorv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007265 05165726375 014531 0 ustar infoflex users !select
REORDER REPORT BY VENDOR ,ITEM
==============================
This menu option is for reorder report by vendor,item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/inreorw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007301 05165726375 014521 0 ustar infoflex users !select
REORDER REPORT BY WAREHOUSE ,ITEM
=================================
This menu option is for reorder report by warehouse,item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@backord
Backorder from Available?
If you wish to deduct backordered quantities from the
available quantitiy before calculation the reorder
quantitiy, this should be "Y". If you wish to ignore
backordered quantities, change this to "N".
@onorder
Add Onorder to Available?
If you wish to add quantities already on order to the
available quantity before calculating the reorder quantity,
this should be "Y". If you want to ignore previously ordered
quantities, change this to "N".
@percent
Percent Range
Enter a blank here to print all items. Entering a
percentage number will report those items coming withing
that percentage of needing reordering.
act/help/indiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003622 05165726373 014145 0 ustar infoflex users !indiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
%
%
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the name for the division. You can use up to 20
characters.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@city
Division City
Enter the city for the division.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/jcdiv.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004164 05165726377 014141 0 ustar infoflex users !indiv
DIVISION ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
The Division entry screen consists of both a SINGLE-RECORD
and MULTI-RECORD portion. The SINGLE-RECORD portion prompts
for the division name and address. The MULTI-RECORD portion
prompts for the G/L account codes for that division.
@div
Division Code
Enter division code.
@name
Division Name
Enter the name for the division. You can use up to 20
characters.
@address1
Division Address - Line 1
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@address2
Division Address - Line 2
Enter the address for the division. You can use up to
20 characters.
@city
Division City
Enter the city for the division.
@st
Division State
Enter the state for the division.
@zip
Division Zip Code
Enter the zip code for the division.
@glalia
Alias Code
This is a code that represents the G/L Account.
@description
Alias Description
This is the G/L Account description.
@glcode
General Ledger Account Code
Enter the G/L Account Code that corresponds to the
description and alias. This account MUST exist in the G/L
Account file.
@wo
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@wl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@go
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@gl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
@po
Account Code Offset
You may optionally specify an offset and length for each of
the code fields listed. The offset and length refers to
the position in the G/L Account code that the code field
will be placed.
@pl
Account Code Length
Enter the length of the item being placed into the G/L
Account Code.
act/help/arecp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002320 05165726366 014122 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@invdate
Enter invoice date.
@perdate
Enter period date.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to copy invoices for.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
copy invoices for. If you do not enter a customer range the
computer will copy all customer's Invoices.
@invno1
Enter beginning range of refno's you would like to copy
invoices for.
@invno2
Enter the range of refno's you would like to copy invoices
for. If you do not enter a refno range the computer will
copy everything.
@pass
Processing statitics.
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are two passes that will take place.
pass 1 verifies the data and pass 2 will copy the data.
@m
The source of the invoice will be displayed here.
@pbatch
The batch number that is created while copying will be
displayed here.
@pcusno
The customer number that is currently being processed will
be displayed here.
@pinvno
The reference number that is currently being processed will
be displayed here.
act/help/aradjr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004347 05165726365 014366 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R ADJUSTMENT BATCH LISTING
============================
@ This section describes how to print your adjustment batches so that
errors can be discovered and corrected prior to posting. Posting will be
discussed in the next section.
rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated (R=Receivable or S=Sales).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print all customers.
act/help/sysfiles.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006333 05165726415 014674 0 ustar infoflex users !sysfiles
SYSTEM-WIDE CONTROL FILE
========================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you fill in
with values appropriate to your installation. These fields
are described below.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press F1 to
save your entries and return to the Master Menu.
@Company
Enter the company name exactly as you want it to appear on
all printed reports and general ledger screens. Use up to 30
characters.
@caddress1
Enter the company address. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@caddress2
Enter the company address. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@ccity
Enter the company city. You can use up to 30 characters in
each line.
@ct
Enter the company state. You can use up to 30 characters in
each line.
@zip
Enter the company zip code. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@phone
Enter the company telephone number. You can use up to 15
characters.
@d
Multiple Divisions (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple divisions, using Y=Yes or
N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the
fields to the right to specify divisional parameters.
@w
Multiple Warehouses (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple warehouses, using Y=Yes
or N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access
the fields to the right to specify warehouse parameters.
@u
Customer Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have customers with subsidiaries, using
Y=Yes or N=No. This feature will enable you to print
separate statements and trial balances for each subsidiary.
A subsidiary can represent a property, job, or location. If
you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the fields to
the right to specify additional customer subsidiary
parameters.
@a
Vendor Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether your vendors have subsidiaries, using Y=Yes
or N=No. This feature will enable you to print separate
checks and trial balances for each subsidiary. A subsidiary
can represent a property, job, or location. If you enter "Y"
then you will be able to access the fields to the right to
specify additional vendor subsidiary parameters.
@1
Account Code Format
Enter the account code format. You can use up to 12
characters including the delimiter. For example, entering
the following
@v
Delimiter
Enter the delimiter to be used for the account code
described above. This is a one character field.
Code(s)
There are a number of codes for which you may specify the
justification (Customer Code, Vendor, Code, Employee Code,
etc.). Valid entries are "R" for Right justification or "L"
for Left justification. If you are using numeric codes you
should use right justification so that they will sort
properly. IMPORTANT: You may NOT change the justification
once data has been entered.
@c
Inventory Costing Method
If you are using inventory you will need to specify the
costing method, using "R" for replacement, "S" for standard,
or "W" for weighted average. Replacement cost is the last
purchase price. Standard cost is a manually assigned cost.
Weighted average cost is an average cost calculated from
purchases.
act/help/inphyr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003701 05165726374 014425 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PHYSICAL COUNT VARIANCE BATCH LISTING
=====================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invenno1
Beginning Inventory Item Number
Enter the first of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print. If you do not enter an item numbers
range the computer will print all inventory items. You may
press the HELP function key to view the list of valid items
numbers.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Item Number
Enter the last of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print.
act/help/inphyr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005353 05165726374 014433 0 ustar infoflex users !select
VARIANCE REPORT
===============
This menu option is for usage variance report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
act/help/glgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004556 05165726371 014135 0 ustar infoflex users ACCOUNTFLEX - General Ledger
The AccountFlex General Ledger is the foundation of the
entire AccountFlex accounting system. It summarizes all of
the transactions from your system's subledgers, providing
you with an accurate, timely picture of your company's
fiscal activities. General Ledger provides you with the
tools to produce a variety of financial reports that ca for
your specific requirements.
(more)
Below are some of its features:
* Provides for recurring journal entries.
* Allows retention of unlimited number of periods.
* Posts transactions to any period in any year.
* Allows flexible account code structures. The maximum length
for the account code is 12 and any alphanumeric character is
acceptable. Also, the account codes may be broken into four
parts with a user defined sizes and delimiters. (more)
* Automatically posts year-end closing entries for clearing
expense and revenue accounts.
* Allows financial reporting for current year without having
closed the prior year.
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as budget
comparisons, current account balance comparisons, retained
earnings, profit and loss and transaction details.
(more)
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes.
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity;
allows only balanced posting to valid accounts.
* Generates financial statements quickly with the Financial
Report Writer---Balance Sheet, Comparative Balance Sheets,
Income Statement, and Comparative Income Statements.
(more)
* Provides a spread sheet like report writer so the novice
user can easily generate custom financial reports.
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/arclean.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000606 05165726366 014442 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@a
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to correct errors.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning of customer range that you want to
view.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending of customer range that you want to view.
@passname
Processing statitics.
@venno
Enter vendor name.
act/help/pogen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002733 05165726400 014135 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Purchase Order
The AccountFlex Purchase Order module tracks orders, receipts of
goods, expected arrival dates, and reconciles orders to invoices.
Below are some of its features:
* Automatically updates vendor and inventory account balances.
* Provides buyer notepad for keeping track of inquiries and
order status. (more)
* Provides reports for inventory reordering, backorders, and
purchase order status by item or vendor.
* Reconciles Orders against Invoices.
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as vendor
balances, aging and invoice history.
* Supports multiple divisions.
(more)
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes (i.e. vendor code,
invoice number, etc.).
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
(more)
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/artrial.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000007511 05165726370 014470 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R AGING REPORT
================
This section describes how to print your Aged Trial Balance
When you are sure all of your entries are correct press the
RUN function key to run the Aged Trial Report as shown
below.
When the printing is complete press the ESCAPE key to return
to the Accounts Receivable menu.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@stdate1
Beginning Transaction Date
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate2
Ending Transaction Date
Enter the ending range of transaction date you would like to
print.All transactions having a transaction date between the
specified range will be printed. Transactions prior to the
starting date will be summarized as beginning balances. If
you do not enter a date range the computer will print all
transactions.
@balance1
Low Balance to Omit
Enter the beginning of customer balance range you would like
to omit.
@balance2
High Balance to Omit
Enter the ending of customer balance range that you would
like to omit. If you do not enter a Balance range the
computer will print all customers.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
@agetype
Age by (T)ransaction, (P)eriod, (D)ue, or (X)Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
@age0
Ageing Period 1.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age1
Ageing Period 2.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age2
Ageing Period 3.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age3
Ageing Period 4.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@age4
Ageing Period 5.
Enter the aging periods in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
act/help/jclbrr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002771 05165726377 014403 0 ustar infoflex users !select
JOB COST LABOR BATCH LISTING
============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
act/help/aropenr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006132 05165726367 014565 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R INVOICE JOURNAL
===================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes that you want to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print everything by default. These codes must exist in
the customer table.
@m
Module
The module source of invoice will be displayed here.
@s
Source
The transaction soucre code. I = Invoices.
@batch
Batch Number
Enter the batch number you would like to print. If you do
batches.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Receipts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include receipts.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
act/help/popurge.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002323 05165726402 014503 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PURGE INVOICES BY INVOICE DATE
==============================
This menu option (43) is for purging sales invoices. Note
that purged sales invoices will no longer be included on
sales report. At a minimun you will want to retain the
last quarter's invoices for generating quaterly report
(in particular the quarterly tax report).
@holdate
Last purge date
This is an non-enterable field that displays the last date
used to purge.
@hpurdate
New purge date
Enter the New Purge Date. All sales invoices posted prior to
this date will be purged.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
You may optionally enter a specific range of invoice numbers
to purge. If you do not then all posted invoiced will be
purged prior to the purge date entered above.
The sales invoice number that is currently being processed
will be displayed as the purging process takes place.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
You may optionally enter a specific range of invoice numbers
to purge. If you do not then all posted invoiced will be
purged prior to the purge date entered above.
The sales invoice number that is currently being processed
will be displayed as the purging process takes place.
act/help/aradjp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002722 05165726364 014275 0 ustar infoflex users !select
POST ADJUSTMENT BATCHES
=======================
This screen allows you to Post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Receivable. It is important that
your adjustments be correctly entered before posting. This
is because once your data has been posted it can no longer
be modified.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin POSTING or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the adjustment will be displayed here.
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last batch
posted.
Transaction
The invoice number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last invoice
posted.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Receivable menu.
act/help/aropenr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006143 05165726367 014570 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R DISTRIBUTION JOURNAL
========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes that you want to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print everything by default. These codes must exist in
the customer table.
@m
Module
The module source of invoice will be displayed here.
@s
Source
The transaction soucre code. I = Invoices.
@batch
Batch Number
Enter the batch number you would like to print. If you do
batches.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Receipts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include receipts.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
act/help/jclbr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004573 05165726377 014142 0 ustar infoflex users !jclbr
JOB COST LABOR ENTRY SCREEN
===========================
This section describes the process of applying labor to
specific jobs. Time cards may also be entered via this menu
choice.
@empno
Employee Code
The employee code is a required entry field. The maximum
entry is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in
the employee table. You may press the HELP function key to
see a list of valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
This is a display-only field showing the pay group code
assigned to this employee.
@deductperiod
Deduction Period
Enter the deduction period number that determines which
deductions to include on checks. For further information
about the deduction scheduling refer to the documentation
for the screen field Deduct Periods for the Enter Employee
screen. If you do not enter a deduction period there will be
no automatic deductions taken on checks.
@trandate
Labor Date
Enter the date on which the labor is performed.
@dpt
Dept
This is the department code assigned to this employee.
@paycode
Earning Code
Enter the earning code. This code must exist in the earning
code table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@dpt
Dept
Enter the department number. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries. This prompt
will only appear if you selected multiple departments on the
payroll control file.
@jobdate
Job Date
This is the date for which the work was performed.
@jobno
Job
Enter the job number.
@payrate
Rate
You will enter a rate if the earning code has a rate factor
assigned to it and the employee has a pay type of "U" or
unit pay. Otherwise enter a payment amount. If you enter a
payment amount, this amount will be displayed under the
column Total located to the right of this field.
@payunits
Units
You will enter the units (usually hours) worked if the
earning code has a rate factor assigned to it and the
employee has a pay type of "U" (which stands for unit pay).
The system will automatically calculate the pay amount based
on the employee's pay rate. The calculated pay amount will
be displayed under the column Total located to the right of
this field.
@payamount
Total
This is a display-only field showing the payment amount for
the earning line.
act/help/jcclsr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001745 05165726377 014405 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
act/help/aropenr3.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006134 05165726367 014571 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R CUSTOMER JOURNAL
====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptinvoice
List Invoices?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
you want to list invoices.
@glcode1
G/L Account
Enter an account code range. You may press the HELP
function key to see a list of valid entries.
@chknofirst
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chknolast
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers that you want to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the
computer and print all checks by default.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes that you want to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print everything by default. These codes must exist in
the customer table.
@m
Module
The module source of invoice will be displayed here.
@s
Source
The transaction soucre code. I = Invoices.
@batch
Batch Number
Enter the batch number you would like to print. If you do
batches.
@postno
Post Number
Enter the post number you would like to print.
@payflag
Include Receipts?
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or
not you would like to include receipts.
@trandat1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@trandat2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending range of invoice transaction date you
would like to print.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of invoice period date you
would like to print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of invoice period date you would
like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
act/help/jclbrp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000754 05165726377 014317 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
JOBCOST LABOR POSTING
=====================
@w
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
@pbatch
Source and Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
@pinvenno
Inventory Number
The inventory number being processed is displayed here.
act/help/apsub.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001404 06720547407 014137 0 ustar infoflex users !apsub
ENTRY SCREEN
==============
@svenno
Code
Enter code number.
@venno
Vendor Number
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the
system.
@name
Vendor Name
Enter the vendor name for payments.
@address1
Address - Line 1
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@address2
Address - Line 2
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@city
City
Enter the vendor city for payments.
@state
State
Enter the vendor state for payments.
@zip
Zip
Enter the vendor zip code for payments.
@contact
Contact Person
Enter the contact person in this field.
@phone
Telephone Number
Enter the telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@fax
Fax Telephone Number
Enter the Fax number for the vendor.
act/help/begin.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000000 05165726370 014100 0 ustar infoflex users act/help/slinvpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003503 05165726413 014603 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R INVOICE POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
This menu option is for a/r invoice posting journal.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Begining Invoice Number
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
act/help/arsttrop.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003750 05165726370 014711 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT STATEMENTS
================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@stdate1
Enter the beginning range of transaction date you would like
to print.
@stdate2
Enter the ending range of transaction date you would like to
print. All transactions having a transaction date between
the specified range will be printed. Transactions prior to
the starting date will be summarized as beginning balances.
If you do not enter a date range the computer will print al
transactions.
@balance1
Enter the beginning range of customer balance you would like
to omit.
@balance2
Enter the ending range of customer balance you would like to
omit. If you do not enter a Balance range the computer will
print all customers.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
@a
Age by (T)ransaction, (P)eriod, (D)ue, or (X)Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
act/help/intfrr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003671 05165726375 014427 0 ustar infoflex users !select
INVENTORY TRANSFERS BATCH LISTING
=================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invenno1
Beginning Inventory Item Number
Enter the first of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print. If you do not enter an item numbers
range the computer will print all inventory items. You may
press the HELP function key to view the list of valid items
numbers.
@invenno2
Ending Inventory Item Number
Enter the last of the range of inventory item numbers you
would like to print.
act/help/invenrd.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005324 05165726376 014505 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
INVENTORY BY ITEM
=================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Code
Enter the first Item Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Item Code
Enter the last Item Code to report on.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
act/help/pydedr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001131 05165726404 014370 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
act/help/aropen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004641 05165726367 014325 0 ustar infoflex users !aropen
A/R INVOICE INQUIRY
====================
This section describes the Inquire Invoice History screen.
With this screen, you can view invoices and their detail.
You will NOT be allowed to make changes while on this
screen.
When the screen appears, enter the Invoice and customer you
would like to view. The information about this invoice will
immediately appear.
To view the list of transactions (invoices, adjustments, and
receipts) for this invoice, press the SAVE function key. The
transactions will be displayed in the MULTI-RECORD portion
of the screen. While on the Transaction portion of the
screen you may press the ZOOM key in order to display detail
information about any transaction that the cursor is
positioned on. The Transaction Detail screen will ap
follows.
@invno
Invoice Number
Enter invoice number you would like to print.
@cusno
Customer ID Number
Enter the customer code to identify the customer in
the system.
@trandate
Enter transaction date.
@m
The source of the invoice will be displayed here.
@batch
The batch number that is created while copying will
be displayed here.
@discdate
Discount date will be displayed here.
@discallow
Discount allow will be displayed here.
@duedate
Due date will be displayed here.
@description
Description of items will be displayed here.
@poordno
po#
Enter purchase order number.
@atrandat
Transaction Date
Enter latest transaction date.
@cusno
Enter the customer code to identify the customer in the
system.
@invno
Invoice Number
The invoice number for this item.
@trandate
Invoice Date
The Invoice Date.
@description
Description
Description of the invoice, if any given.
@amountdue
Amount Due
The balance still owed on the invoice.
@artrandat
Transaction Date
The Transaction date for this open invoice.
@M
Module
The module which generated this invoice.
@S
Source
The source of this invoice.
@BATCH
Batch
This is the batch number from which this invoice was posted.
@adescription
Description
This is the description of this invoice.
@adiscount
Discount
This is the amount of discount available for this invoice.
@aamount
Amount
This is the balance due on this invoice.
!ardist
@glcode
G/L Account Code
This is the G/L account code this distribution posted to.
@amount
Amount
This is the amount of the distribution.
act/help/invenrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005324 05165726376 014510 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
INVENTORY BY ITEM
=================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Code
Enter the first Item Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Item Code
Enter the last Item Code to report on.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the reorder report
you wish to print.
@whs
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory dates for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@loc1
Begining Location
Enter the begining location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@loc2
Ending Location
Enter the ending location of the physical count worksheet
you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the physical count
worksheet you wish to print.
act/help/indmdrg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006011 05165726373 014453 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DEMAND REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM,REQUIRE DATE
=========================================
This menu option is for usage demand report by group
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Required Ship Date
Enter the begining required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@reqdate2
Required Ship Date
Enter the ending required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory numbers you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory numbers you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
act/help/tbjob.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004360 05165726415 014131 0 ustar infoflex users !tbjob
JOB NUMBER ENTRY
================
This screen is for the entering of job related information.
The information gathered here will allow tracking of job
performance.
%
@jobno
Job Number
This is a required field. This job number will
be used throughout the system to identify this job.
@jobname
Job Title
Enter a job title that will identify the nature of the job
in such a way that you'll be easily able to identify it
later.
@description1
Description
This is room for additional comments to amplify the title.
This entry is optional.
@description2
Description
This is room for additional comments to amplify the title.
This entry is optional.
@cusno
Customer Number
This is the number of the customer for whom the job is being
done. This is a required entry.
@contact
Contact
This is the person at the customer's location to whom
information or questions about the job should be
directed.
@qtedate
Quote Date
This is the date on which the quote for this job was given.
This field is optional.
@orddate
Order Date
This is the date on which the order for the job was received
from the customer. This field is also optional.
@duedate
Due Date
This is the date on which the job is to be completed. This
is an optional field.
@clsdate
Close Date
This is the date the job was completed. This entry is
optional at initial entry, but will have to be supplied at
some point in order for the job status to be changed. Job
Close posting looks for this date before changing the job
status to "C"; and Job Purge needs a job status of "C" to
delete the entry.
@est_lbr
Estimated Labor Cost
Enter Estimated Labor costs for the completion of this job.
@est_mtl
Estimated Material Cost
Enter Estimated Material costs for the components needed to
do this job.
@est_con
Estimated Contractor Cost
Enter Estimated Contractor costs for the completion of this
job.
@est_oth
Estimated Other Costs
Enter Estimated Other costs for the completion of this job.
@billable
Total Billable
Enter Total amount client will be billed for this job, if
the estimate was given for a flat fee basis. This field is
optional and documentary.
act/help/indmdri.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005766 05165726373 014475 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DEMAND REPORT BY ITEM,REQUIRE DATE
===================================
This menu option is for demand report by item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Required Ship Date
Enter the begining required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@reqdate2
Required Ship Date
Enter the ending required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory numbers you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory numbers you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
act/help/inhisr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002372 05165726374 014413 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post No
This field is the unique number assigned to the last posting
and should already be filled in.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Code
Enter the first Item Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Item Code
Enter the last Item Code to report on.
act/help/slordr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004341 05165726414 014415 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES ORDER
=================
This menu option is for ....
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
%
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reportmode
Calculate Prices
Enter the letter for the prices to be used in calculating
the invoices totals.
@ordno1
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@ordno2
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@podate1
Enter the begining dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Enter the ending dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@msg1
Message
Enter here a message to be printed in the body of the
invoice.
@msg2
Message - Line 2
This may be a continuation of the message to print on the
order.
act/help/slordr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004070 05165726414 014415 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT SALES ORDER
=================
This menu option is for ....
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
%
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reportmode
Calculate Prices
Enter the appropriate letter to select the pricing at which
the invoices will be printed.
@ordno1
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@ordno2
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@podate1
Enter the begining dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Enter the ending dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/pygen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003356 05165726405 014156 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Payroll
The AccountFlex Payroll module calculates and maintains
payroll and labor distributions for employees and/or
contractors.
Below are some of its features:
* Automatically determines employee federal, state, and local
taxes, and payroll deductions.
(more)
* Handles regular, overtime, piece work, bonus, one-time
deductions, and miscellaneous earnings.
* Calculates gross earnings by hour, day, month, or user
defined formula.
* Prints vacation, supplemental checks in user-defined
formats.
* Supports pre-tax deductions for pension plans, IRA's, Keogh,
and 401(k)'s.
(more)
* Automatically accrues and charges vacation and sick pay.
* Allows posting to previous periods.
* Prepares magnetic media for government reporting.
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as employee
accrual amounts.
* Supports multiple divisions.
(more)
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source, pay
date, entry date, posting dates, and job descriptions.
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
(more)
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/tbgl.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001035 05165726415 013755 0 ustar infoflex users !tbgl
TAX CODE ENTRY SCREEN
=====================
Tax code entry screen consists of both a SINGLE-RECORD and
MULTI-RECORD portion. The SINGLE-RECORD portion prompts for
a tax code and its description. Tax code are usually
equivalent to counties since taxes are the same within
county.
%
%
@m
Enter the tax code.
@description
Enter a descriptive information about the tax code.
@c
Enter?
@d
Enter the default division code for this warehouse.
@w
Enter the warehouse code.
@g
Enter the product group.
@p
Enter the product catagory.
act/help/apgen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003705 05165726362 014126 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Accounts Payable
The AccountFlex Accounts Payable module tracks amounts owed
to vendors and permits automatic or manual application of
payments to specific invoices.
Below are some of its features:
* Provides for recurring expenses.
(more)
* Handles both open-item and balance-forward accounts.
* Allows unlimited partial payments for any invoice.
* Allows manual and voided checks.
* Prints the Aged Trial Balance report as of any transaction
date range.
* Allows entry of new months transactions before having posted
last months transactions.
(more)
* Prints reports for all vendors or for a range of vendors.
* Allows runtime selection of aging periods for Aged Trial
Balance.
* Allows posting of invoices to any period in any year.
* Allows Prepayment of invoices.
* Maintains Check Register and allows Reversal of previously
posted Checks.
(more)
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as vendor
balances, aging and invoice history.
* Supports multiple divisions.
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes (i.e. vendor code,
invoice number, etc.).
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
(more)
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a
menu-driven user interface.
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/glcoabr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003176 05165726371 014447 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT BUDGETS
=============
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter the beginning range of account numbers you would
like to print.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter the ending range of account numbers you would like
to print. If you do not enter an account range the
computer will print all accounts.
@p1
Beginning Period
Enter the beginning range of period you would like to
print.
@y1
Beginning Year
Enter the beginning range of year you would lke to print.
@p2
Ending Period
Enter the ending range of period you would like to print.
@y2
Ending Year
Enter the ending range of year you would like to print.
act/help/indmdrw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006025 05165726373 014500 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DEMAND REPORT BY WAREHOUSE, ITEM,REQUIRE DATE
=============================================
This menu option is for usage demand report by warehouse
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@reqdate1
Required Ship Date
Enter the begining required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@reqdate2
Required Ship Date
Enter the ending required ship date for the demand report
you wish to print.
@whsno1
Begining Warehouse Number
Enter the begining warehouse number you want to print.
@whsno2
Ending Warehouse Number
Enter the ending warehouse number you want to print.
@invenno1
Beginning Item Number
Enter the begining inventory numbers you wish to print.
@invenno2
Ending Item Number
Enter the ending inventory numbers you wish to print.
@grp1
Begining Group Number
Enter the begining group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@grp2
Ending Group Number
Enter the ending group number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat1
Begining Category Number
Enter the begining category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cat2
Ending Category Number
Enter the ending category number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor number for the demand report
you wish to print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
@sl1
Begining Salesman Name
Enter the begining salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
@sl2
Ending Salesman Name
Enter the ending salesman name for the demand report
you wish to print.
act/help/pyearnr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001130 05165726404 014560 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
act/help/glinvr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004237 05165726372 014420 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L TRANSACTION BATCH LISTING
=============================
This section describes how to print your transaction batches
so that errors can be discovered and corrected prior to
posting. Posting will be discussed in the next section.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct press the SAVE key to run the G/L
Transaction Batch Listing report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@m
Source of Invoices
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated (R=Receivable and
I=Invoice).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like
to print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invno1
Beginning Transaction Number
Enter the beginning of transaction numbers you would like to
print.
@invno2
Ending Transaction Number
Enter the ending range of transaction numbers you would like
to print. If you do not enter a transaction range the
computer will print all transactions.
act/help/glinvr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003346 05165726372 014421 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L TRANSACTION BATCH SUMMARY LISTING
=====================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@batch1
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like
to print.
@batch2
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@invno1
Enter the beginning range of transaction numbers you would
like to print.
@invno2
Enter the ending range of transaction numbers you would
like to print. If you do not enter a transaction range
the computer will print all transactions.
@glcode1
Enter the beginning range of account codes you would like
to print.
@glcode2
Enter the ending range of account codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a account range the computer
will print all accounts.
act/help/arend.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000276 05165726367 014132 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@mondate
Enter last month-end run date.
@yeardate
Enter last year-end run date.
@a
Run month-end , year-end , or both (M,Y,B).
@cusno
Enter customer number.2
act/help/slpickr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004012 05165726414 014471 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PICKING LIST
==================
This menu option is for print picking list
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@ordno1
Starting Order Number
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@ordno2
Ending Order Number
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@podate1
Starting Order Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Ending Order Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/apsubr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001526 05165726363 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/P PRINT VENDOR BY CODE
========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning of vendor range you would like
to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending of vendor range you would like to
print.
act/help/glact.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004473 10174252255 014120 0 ustar infoflex users !glact
Use this program to define your chart of accounts hierarchy structure.
This structure will control the order, format, and subtotaling on
reports such as the standard Income Statement and Balance Sheet.
Accountflex provides a very unique and intuitive approach for defining
this structure. The structure is entered using an editor-like
screen and looks just like the report.
Each structure line corresponds to a line on the report.
If a structure line specifies a range of accounts, the report
prints the structure line as the heading, then indents
2 spaces before printing each account line.
To avoid printing the heading, enter an '@' instead of the description.
The placement of the '@' determines where the account
descriptions appear on the report.
Text following the '@' is considered comments and has no
effect on the report.
Some rules for entering the structure are as follows.
1) When specifiying an account range both values must be entered.
Also, it is not required that accounts be valid so you can
put maximum ranges to accomodate future plans.
2) The order that accounts are defined in the structure is important.
Accounts must be together by account type and account types
must be in the following order.
All Asset accounts must appear first, followed by
Liabilities, Capital, Income, and then Expenses.
3) All accounts should be represented within the structure.
Those accounts not represented appear on reported at the
end of their respective account type.
4) Accounts may only be specified once.
The program warns if any accounts have been mulitply defined.
5) Subtotaling is done for accounts on the same level.
Accounts having the same description indentation are considered to
be on the same level.
6) Blank lines are not allowed and cause unpredictable results.
To get a blank line to appear on the report, use the '@' without
specifying an account range.
7) The minimum allowable structure must include the 5 Account type
descriptions with the same indentation. No account ranges
need be specified in this scenario.
Be sure the check out our sample subaccount structure.
Lastly, the structure is not set in stone and may be changed at any time.
@desc
s is a test
act/help/jcclsp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000632 05165726377 014314 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
JOBCOST JOB CLOSE POSTING
=========================
@w
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
@pbatch
Source and Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
act/help/py940ez.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001445 05165726402 014252 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT FEDERAL FORM 940-EZ (FUTA)
================================
This selection will print out the Federal REport 940-EZ.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@year
Year
Enter the year for the "Payroll Quarterly Report".
act/help/inunit.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000674 05165726375 014350 0 ustar infoflex users !inunit
UNIT CONVERSION TABLE
=====================
This screen allows the conversion of units of measurement
from one format to another.
@unit
Units
This is the input unit that is to be converted.
@description
Description
This is the description of the input unit.
@fun
From Unit
This is the converted unit.
@factor
Factor
This is the factor that will produce the output unit when
multiplied by the From Unit.
act/help/apchkr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004531 05165726361 014362 0 ustar infoflex users !select
CHECK BATCH LISTING
===================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Enter a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@chkdate1
Beginning Check Date
Enter the beginning range of check dates you would like to
print.
@chkdate2
Ending Check Date
Enter the ending range of Check Dates you would like to
print. If you do not enter a date range the computer will
print all Checks.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all the vendors.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all the vendors.
@m
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
S=Sales).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@glcode
G/L Account Code
This is not a required entry field because the system will
default and print all General Ledger accounts.
@chkno1
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@chkno2
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a check number range the computer
will print everything.
act/help/glrptp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002274 05165726372 014345 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L FINANCIAL REPORTS
=====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rp1
Beginning Report
Enter the beginning range of report you would
like to print.
@rp2
Ending Report
Enter the ending range of report you would like
to print.
@pd
Period to Report
Enter the period you would like to print.
@py
Year to Report
Enter the year you would like to print.
act/help/glrptr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002067 05165726372 014347 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L FINANCIAL REPORTS
=====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rp1
Beginning Report
Enter the beginning range of report you would
like to print.
@rp2
Ending Report
Enter the ending range of report you would like
to print.
act/help/pyempr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002143 05165726405 014422 0 ustar infoflex users !select
EMPLOYEE DETAIL REPORT
======================
When this screen appears enter "P" for the report
destination and then press the RUN function key to send the
report to the printer. The Employee Table Listing will
appear as shown below.
Review the Employee Accounts for completeness and if any
additions or changes need to be made, select the Enter
Employee option on the menu.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@empno
Employee Number
Enter employee number or id code. If no employee number is
entered, all employees will be reported.
act/help/jcmtlp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000677 05165726400 014323 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@w
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
@pbatch
Source and Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
@pinvenno
Inventory Number
The inventory number being processed is displayed here.
act/help/pyw2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001646 05165726406 013736 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT FEDERAL FORM W-2
======================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@year
Year
Enter the year for the "Printing Federal Form".
@empno1
Beginning Employee No.
Enter the beginning employee id or number which you want to
print.
@empno2
Ending Employee No.
Enter the last employee id or number which you wish to
print.
act/help/aprecp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002132 05165726363 014300 0 ustar infoflex users !select
COPY RECURRING INVOICES
=======================
This section describes how to copy recurring invoices.
Copying recurring invoices will create a batch of invoices.
These invoices can be reviewed and posted in the same manner
as invoices that are manually entered.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the beginning range of vendor codes you would like to
copy invoices for.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending range of vendor codes you would like to
copy invoices for. If you do not enter a vendor range the
computer will copy all vendor's Invoices.
@invno1
Beginning Reference Number
Enter the beginning range of refno's you would like to copy
invoices for.
@invno2
Ending Reference Number
Enter the ending range of refno's you would like to copy
invoices for. If you do not enter a refno range the
computer will copy everything.
@invdate
Invoice Date
Enter here the date you wish assigned to the invoices being
generated by this copy.
@perdate
Period Date
Enter here the period to which you wish these invoices to
post.
act/help/apadj.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010105 06653657530 014106 0 ustar infoflex users !apadj
A/P ADJUSTMENT BATCH ENTRY
==========================
This section describes the process of entering adjustments
for invoices into your Accounts Payable program. Adjustments
are entered to alter an existing invoice amount.
Adjustments are entered in groups or batches. Each batch may
consist of one or more adjustments; each adjustment may have
one or more distributions.
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to Save the Invoice screen. The cursor will
then jump to the distribution screen where the distributions
relating to the invoice should be entered.
@m
The source field is a display only field that displays the
original source of the adjustment: "S-I" stands for Sales
Adjustment, and "R-A" stands for Accounts Receivable
Adjustment.
@batch
Batch Number
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to identify a group of adjustments for both editing
and auditing purposes.
@batdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@batchtotal
The total field will display the total of all adjustments
within the batch.
!apdist
Once the data has been entered correctly, press the SAVE
function key to save the distribution screen. The cursor
will then jump back to the Adjustment Invoice screen to
enter another adjustment. If there are no more adjustments
to be entered, you may return to the batch screen by
pressing the ESCAPE key. Pressing the ESCAPE key whi batch
screen will return you to the Accounts Payable menu.
@invno
Invoice
The invoice number represents the number of the
invoice that is being adjusted.
@venno
Vendor Code
The vendor code is a required entry field. The maximum entry
is 6 alphanumeric characters. This code must exist in the
vendor table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@trandate
Adjustment Date
The Adjustment date will default to the system date. The
adjustment date represents the date that the adjustment took
place.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date The
period date represents the period that the invoice should be
posted.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@poordno
PO#
This is your purchase order number.
@tran2dat
Invoice Date
The field will default to the original Invoice Date.
Changing this date will override the original Invoice Date.
@discdate
Discount Date
This is not a required entry field. If the invoice is paid
by the discount date the discount allowed will be deducted
from the amount due.
@discallow
Discount Allowed
This is not a required entry field. The discount is the
amount that should be deducted from the invoice if paid by
the discount date. The field allows a 9-character numeric
entry.
@duedate
Due Date
This is not a required entry field. The due date represents
the date that the invoice must be paid before it becomes
past due.
@description
Description
This is not a required entry field. The description allows
you to describe the type of invoice. The field holds a
maximum of 40 characters.
@glcode
Account #
Enter the Account Code. You can use up to 12 characters
including the delimeter. This code must exist in the Account
Code Table. You may press the HELP function key to see a
list of valid entries.
@gldesc
Account Title
The account title will automatically be displayed and is a
non entry field.
@amount
Amount
The amount field allows a maximum entry of 8 digits.
A positive value will credit the G/L Account and a negative
value will debit it.
@totamount
Total
The Total field will display the total amount of all
Distributions within this Invoice.
act/help/sysfile.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000070411 07022527755 014507 0 ustar infoflex users !sysfiles
SYSTEM-WIDE CONTROL FILE
========================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you fill in
with values appropriate to your installation. These fields
are described below.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press F1 to
save your entries and return to the Master Menu.
@company
Enter the company name exactly as you want it to appear on
all printed reports and general ledger screens. Use up to 30
characters.
@caddress1
Enter the company address. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@caddress2
Enter the company address. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@ccity
Enter the company city. You can use up to 30 characters in
each line.
@ct
Enter the company state. You can use up to 30 characters in
each line.
@zip
Enter the company zip code. You can use up to 30 characters
in each line.
@phone
Enter the company telephone number. You can use up to 15
characters.
@d
Multiple Divisions (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple divisions, using Y=Yes or
N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the
fields to the right to specify divisional parameters.
@w
Multiple Warehouses (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple warehouses, using Y=Yes
or N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access
the fields to the right to specify warehouse parameters.
@u
Customer Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have customers with subsidiaries, using
Y=Yes or N=No. This feature will enable you to print
separate statements and trial balances for each subsidiary.
A subsidiary can represent a property, job, or location. If
you enter "Y" then you will be able to access the fields to
the right to specify additional customer subsidiary
parameters.
@a
Vendor Subs (Y/N)
Indicate whether your vendors have subsidiaries, using Y=Yes
or N=No. This feature will enable you to print separate
checks and trial balances for each subsidiary. A subsidiary
can represent a property, job, or location. If you enter "Y"
then you will be able to access the fields to the right to
specify additional vendor subsidiary parameters.
@1
Account Code Format
Enter the account code format. You can use up to 12
characters including the delimiter. For example, entering
the following
@v
Delimiter
Enter the delimiter to be used for the account code
described above. This is a one character field.
Code(s)
There are a number of codes for which you may specify the
justification (Customer Code, Vendor, Code, Employee Code,
etc.). Valid entries are "R" for Right justification or "L"
for Left justification. If you are using numeric codes you
should use right justification so that they will sort
properly. IMPORTANT: You may NOT change the justification
once data has been entered.
@c
Inventory Costing Method
If you are using inventory you will need to specify the
costing method, using "R" for replacement, "S" for standard,
or "W" for weighted average. Replacement cost is the last
purchase price. Standard cost is a manually assigned cost.
Weighted average cost is an average cost calculated from
purchases.
@versioncode
Enter version code if one has been assigned to you by Infoflex Inc..
You will be assigned a version code by Infoflex Inc. if Accountflex
has been customized for your site.
!slctl
SALES ORDER CONTROL FILE
========================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Sales Order
menu.
@rec
Quote Number Prefix
Enter Quote Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the quote number. The starting number for quotes is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter quote numbers
manually.
@recinvoice
Starting Quotes Invoce Number
The starting number for quotes is entered in this field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter quote numbers
manually.
@ord
Order Number Prefix
Enter Order Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the order number. The starting number for orders is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers
manually.
@order
Order Number
The starting number for orders is entered in this. You may
enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers manually.
@inv
Invoice Number Prefix
Enter Invoice Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the invoice number. The starting number for invoices is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@invoice
Starting Invoice Number
The starting number for invoices is entered in this field.
You may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@useordno
Use Order Number for Invoices
Enter 'Y' if you want the invoice number to be the same
as the order number. The major effect here is that when
orders are converted to invoices, the invoice
will be assigned the same number as the order.
Normally, when converting orders to invoices the invoice
is assigned the next starting invoice number.
@postlevel
G/L Posting Method
Send (T)ransactions or (S)ummary of transactions to G/L when
posting
Enter "T" if you would like to have each transaction posted
to the General Ledger or "S" if you would like only summary
totals posted to the General Ledger. You only need to answer
this prompt if you are using the General Ledger. By posting
each transaction (option "T"), you will be able to see every
transaction responsible for period totals while in the
General Ledger. The downside of posting individual
transactions to the General Ledger is that the process will
be slower and significantly more disk space will be used.
@postadvancepay
Post Advance Payments
Advance payments are payments which are entered with sales
orders and invoices. These payments may be cash, check,
and/or credit cards. To have advance payments posted to
Accounts Receivable and General Ledger,
you must enter the appropriate date code
in this field. The date code determines the transaction
date that will be assigned to the posted payments. You should
select a date code that comes closest to the actual date
payments are deposited so the Bank G/L account will be accurate.
The valid date code choices are (E)ntry date, (O)rder date,
(I)nvoice date, and (P)ost date. Note that this method may
not be satisfactory if significant time elapses between
depositing and posting advance payments.
If this method is not satisfactory the alternatives
are as follows.
(1) Have advance payments posted to a G/L liability account
called Advance Sales Payments instead of the Bank account.
This is accomplished by modifying the Sales Division
Table. Bank deposits can then be entered as
G/L transactions crediting the Bank Bank account and
debiting the Advance Sales Payments account.
(2) Do not post advance payments and enter them manually in A/R.
@copyrecnotes
Copy Inventory Notes to Quotes, Orders, Invoices\fP
Enter 'Y' to automatically copy inventory notes to
quotes, orders, or Invoices. These notes and any
manually entered notes may later be printed
as part of the quote, order, or invoice.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
@shppct
Freight Overhead Percent
Enter the overhead percent if you want an overhead added
to freight charges.
@shippct
Freight Charge by Weight
Enter the freight cost per unit weight
if you want freight charges calculated
based on the weight.
@qtydefault
Default Quantity
Enter a quantity to default to when entering
quotes, orders, or invoices.
@actionifnoqty
Insufficient Inventory Action
Enter the action to take if there is insufficient
inventory when entering orders or invoices.
The possible actions are B=Backorder, O=Overide,
W=Warehouse. Backorder will fill the order
as much as inventory allows. Overide will fill
order completely and cause inventory to go negative.
If you have multiple warehouse, the warehouse
action allow you to select inventory from other
warehouses.
@credit_limit
Credit Limit
Enter the credit limit for customers.
This credit limit will be used if a credit limit
is not specified on the customer table.
@credit_agelimit
Age Credit Limit, for Age
Enter the Age Credit Limit and the Age cutoff days.
The system will check that the amount due on
invoices older than the Age cuttoff days is less
than the Age Credit Limit.
@o_fillminpercent
Minimum Fill% on Orders
Enter the minimum fill percent required for
converting orders to invoices. The fill percent
is the ratio of the Commited Amount divided by the
Ordered Amount.
@q_statusprint
Requirements
This section is where you will select requirements
for quotes, orders, and invoices by entering a 'Y'
in the appropriate column.
The following table describes each of the possible
columns and their requirement.
Col Requirement
------------------------------------------
P Print Order, Quote, or Invoice.
Pic Print Picking Listd.
Pak Print Packing List.
Auth Authorize Credit Cards.
Fill Meet Fill percent. The Fill percent
defined above is used for Orders only.
100% is assummed for Quotes and Invoices.
Limit NOT exceed Credit Limit.
Age NOT exceed Age Credit Limit.
These requirements provide control over the
flow of quotes, orders, and invoices thru the system.
In general, Quotes can NOT be converted to Orders,
Orders can NOT be converted to Invoices,
and Invoices can NOT be posted until their
respective requirements have been satisfied.
For example, requiring the picking list be
printed prevents an order from being converted
to an invoice until the picking list has been printed.
The sales quote, order, and invoice entry screens
have status flags showing the status of each requirement.
The status of each requirement and its effect on the flow of
quotes, orders, and invoices thru the system are
described in chapter 5 \fBEnter Orders\fP.
!poctl
SALES ORDER CONTROL FILE
========================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Purchase
Order menu.
@order
Order Number
The starting number for orders is entered in this. You may
enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers manually.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
!inctl
INVENTORY CONTROL
=================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Inventory
menu.
The following describes each parameter field.
@h
Keep Transaction History
Enter 'Y' if you would like to maintain a history file
containing records for each adjustment, transfer, physical
count adjustment entry.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
!glctl
GENERAL LEDGER CONTROL FILE
===========================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation. When
you are sure all your entries are correct press the SAVE key
to save your entries and return to the General Ledger menu.
The following describes each parameter field.
@perstart
Fiscal Year Date
Enter the starting date of current fiscal year. Once posting
has been done, your starting fiscal year should always begin
with the same month.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the date tolerance. This field defines the transaction
and period date tolerance in relation to the current date.
For example, 10 would only allow the transaction and period
date to be + or - 10 days of the current system date. You
can enter up to 3 digits in the date tolerance field.
@glc_re
Retained Earnings
Enter the default G/L account codes for retained earnings.
This is a required entry field and the code must exist in
the chart of accounts.
@glc_profit
Profit/Loss
Enter the default G/L account codes for profit/loss. This is
a required entry field and the code must exist in the chart
of accounts.
@rec
Recurring Transaction Prefix
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the transaction number.
@recinvoice
Starting Recurring Transaction Number
The starting number for recurring transactions is entered in
this field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
recurring transaction numbers manually.
@ord
Order Number Prefix
Enter Order Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the order number. The starting number for orders is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers
manually.
@order
Order Number
The starting number for orders is entered in this. You may
enter a zero if you wish to enter order numbers manually.
@inv
Transaction Number Prefix
Enter Invoice Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the transaction number.
@invoice
Starting Transaction Number
The starting number for transaction is entered in this
field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter transaction
numbers manually.
!arctl
A/R CONTROL FILE
================
This screen has a number of entry fields which you fill in
with values appropriate to your installation. These fields
are described below.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press F1 to
save your entries and return to the Master Menu.
@inv
Invoice Number Prefix
Enter Invoice Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the invoice number. The starting number for invoices is
entered in the field immediately after the prefix field. You
may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@invoice
Starting Invoice Number
The starting number for invoices is entered in this field.
You may enter a zero if you wish to enter invoice numbers
manually.
@rec
Recurring Invoice Number Prefix
Enter Recurring Invoice Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the recurring invoice number. The starting number for
recurring invoices is entered in the field immediately after
the prefix field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
recurring invoice numbers manually.
@recinvoice
Starting Recurring Invoice Number
The starting number for recurring invoices is entered in
this field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
recurring invoice numbers manually.
@int
Finance Charge Number Prefix
Enter Finance Charge Prefix & Starting Number
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the finance charge number. The starting number for
finance charges is entered in the field immediately after
the prefix field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
finance charge numbers manually.
@intinvoice
Starting Finance Charge Number
The starting number for finance charges is entered in this
field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter finance
charge numbers manually.
@h
Retain Transaction Distribution
Enter "Y" to save transaction distribution history or "N" to
discard. Distributions are the account line items for each
invoice or adjustment. The downside of saving distributions
is that the posting process will be slower and significantly
more disk space will be used up.
@r
Retain Receipt Register
Retain payment receipts on file for future reporting. If
this option is set to "N", receipts will not be retained
after they are posted.
@p
G/L Posting Method
Enter "T" if you would like to have each transaction posted
to the General Ledger or "S" if you would like only summary
totals posted to the General Ledger. You only need to answer
this prompt if you are using the General Ledger. By posting
each transaction (option "T"), you will be able to see every
transaction responsible for period totals while in the Gener
Ledger. The downside of posting individual transactions to t
General Ledger is that the posting process will be slower an
significantly more disk space will be used up. There is one
important restriction when selecting "S" to post transactio
summaries; all transactions within a batch MUST belong to t
same time period.
@a
Age by Transaction, Period, Due, or XDiscount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
@a0
Aging Period 1
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a1
Aging Period 2
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a2
Aging Period 3
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a3
Aging Period 4
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a4
Aging Period 5
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@finance
Finance Charge
Enter the default finance charge to be used when applying
late charges.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
@address1
Addr1
Enter the default address that will be used when entering
customer information.
@address2
Addr2
Enter the default address that will be used when entering
customer information.
@city
City
Enter the default city that will be used when entering
customer information.
@state
State
Enter the default state that will be used when entering
customer information.
@zip
Zip Code
Enter the default zip code that will be used when entering
customer information.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
Enter the default credit limit that will be used when
entering customer information.
@m
Method
Enter the default payment method that will be used when
entering customer information. You may enter "O' for Open
Item, and "B" for Balance Forward (see Customer entry Screen
for detailed explanation).
@f
Finance Charge
Enter the default Charge Finance flag that will be used when
entering customer information (see Customer entry Screen for
detailed explanation). Your choices are Y = Yes, and N = No.
@i
Invoices
Enter the default Print Invoice flag that will be used when
entering customer information (see Customer entry Screen for
detailed explanation). Your choices are Y = Yes, and N = No.
@s
Statements
Enter the default Print Statements flag that will be used
when entering customer information (see Customer entry
Screen for detailed explanation). Your choices are Y = Yes,
and N = No.
!apctl
SETUP ACCOUNTS PAYABLE CONTROL FILE
===================================
This section describes how to set up the Accounts Payable
control file. This control file is used for defining
parameters that apply throughout the Accounts Payable
System.
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Accounts
Payable menu.
The following describes each parameter field.
@rec
Recurring Invoice Number Prefix
Enter the prefix (up to 3 characters) that will be prepended
to the recurring invoice number. The starting number for
recurring invoices is entered in the field immediately after
the prefix field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
recurring invoice numbers manually.
@recinvoice
Starting Recurring Invoice Number
The starting number for recurring invoices is entered in
this field. You may enter a zero if you wish to enter
recurring invoice numbers manually.
@h
Retain Transaction Detail when posting(Y/N)
Enter "Y" to save transaction distribution history or "N" to
discard. Distributions are the account line items for each
invoice or adjustment. The downside of saving distributions
is that the posting process will be slower and significantly
more disk space will be used up.
@p
G/L Posting Method
Enter "T" if you would like to have each transaction posted
to the General Ledger or "S" if you would like only summary
totals posted to the General Ledger. You only need to answer
this prompt if you are using the General Ledger. By posting
each transaction (option "T"), you will be able to see every
transaction responsible for period totals while in the
General Ledger. The downside of posting individual
transactions to the General Ledger is that the pos process
will be slower and significantly more disk space will be u
up. There is one important restriction when selecting "S"
transaction summaries; all transactions within a batch MU to
the same time period.
@a
Age by Transaction, Period, Due, or Discount Date
Enter the date you would like used when aging invoices.
@a0
Aging Period 1
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a1
Aging Period 2
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a2
Aging Period 3
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a3
Aging Period 4
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@a4
Aging Period 5
Enter the aging period in number of days. You are provided
with up to 5 aging periods. These aging periods should be
entered in ascending order. Periods assigned a value of 0 or
blank (other than the first period) will be ignored.
@days
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
@chkprinter
Check Printer
Enter the default printer name where checks are to be
printed.
@address1
Addr1
Enter the default address that will be used when entering
vendor information.
@address2
Addr2
Enter the default address that will be used when entering
vendor information.
@city
City
Enter the default city that will be used when entering
vendor information.
@state
State
Enter the default state that will be used when entering
vendor information.
@zip
Zip Code
Enter the default zip code that will be used when entering
vendor information.
@credlim
Credit Limit
Enter the default credit limit that will be used when
entering vendor information.
@m
Method
Enter the default payment method that will be used when
entering vendor information, You may enter "O" for Open
item, and "B" for Balance Forward (see Vendor entry Screen
for detailed explanation).
@f
FOB
Enter the default Freight On Board for vendor entry. Valid
entries are "D" for Destination, and "S" for Ship Point.
!pyctl
PAYROLL CONTROL FILE
====================
This section describes how to set up the payroll control
file. This control file is used for defining parameters that
apply throughout the Payroll System.
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Payroll
menu.
@d
Multiple Departments (Y/N)
Indicate whether you have multiple departments using Y=Yes
or N=No. If you enter "Y" then you will be able to access
the fields to the right to specify departmental parameters.
@D
Justification
Valid entries are "R" for Right justification or "L"
for Left justification. If you are using numeric codes you
should use right justification so that they will sort
properly.
@div
Default Division
Enter the division code that will be the default whenever
division code is needed during payroll activities.
@divname
Reference Name
Enter the name by which Departments will be known throughout
the payroll system. This is the name which will appear on
reports and screen to denote departments.
@da
Reference Abbreviation
Enter the abbreviation for the reference name just entered.
This is the abbreviation that will show whenever an
abbreviated reference name is needed.
@glcode
Payroll Bank Account
Enter the G/L account code representing your payroll
checking account.
@a
Use Accrual Posting G/L (Y/N)?
Enter 'Y' to use the accrual method or otherwise enter 'N'.
If you select 'N', the check posting program will create one
G/L batch file which will use the transaction date (or check
date) as the G/L period. The accrual method creates two G/L
batches for each check posting. One batch expenses wages,
employer taxes, and deductions using the ending pay date as
the G/L period. The other batch credits the cash account and
employee tax liability accounts using the transaction date
(or check date) as the G/L period.
@t
Time Card Entry
Enter 'Y' to allow time card entry while in the edit check
program or otherwise enter 'N'. You will want to enter 'Y'
if employees work for more than one department durring a pay
period or you keeping track of work by job number.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
@chkprinter
Check Printer
Enter the default printer name which will be used to print
checks.
!jcctl
JOB COST CONTROL
================
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill in with values appropriate to your installation.
When you are sure all your entries are correct press the
SAVE key to save your entries and return to the Inventory
menu.
The following describes each parameter field.
@daytolerance
Date Tolerance
Enter the number of days that transaction or period dates
may vary from the current date.
act/help/glcoar1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003006 05165726371 014356 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L JOURNAL BY PERIOD DATE
==========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of period date you would like to
print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of period date you would like to to
print.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter the beginning account number you would like to print.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter the ending account number you would like to print. If
you do not enter an account range the computer will print
all accounts.
act/help/glcoar2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003253 05165726371 014363 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L JOURNAL BY ACCOUNT
======================
This section describes how to print the journal by account
code report.
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@perdate1
Beginning Period Date
Enter the beginning range of period date you would like to
print.
@perdate2
Ending Period Date
Enter the ending range of period date you would like to to
print.
@glcode1
Beginning Account Number
Enter the beginning account number you would like to print.
@glcode2
Ending Account Number
Enter the ending account number you would like to print. If
you do not enter an account range the computer will print
all accounts.
act/help/glbal.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002110 05165726371 014102 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L BALANCE SHEET
=================
Balance Sheet
This section discusses how to print your Balance Sheet.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@p1
Accounting Period
Enter the period you would like to print.
@y1
Report for Year
Enter the year you would like to print.
act/help/arsub.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010232 06720547062 014135 0 ustar infoflex users !arsub
ENTRY SCREEN
============
This section describes how to set up your customer
subsidiaries. Customer subsidiaries can be anything from
multiple jobs, properties, or locations that you or your
customer want differentiated on reports and/or statements.
If you do not have customer subsidiaries you may skip this
section. To use subsidiaries you should have already set t
System-wide control parameter for Customer Subsidiaries to
The first step in setting up your customer's subsidiaries is
to select the Enter Subsidiaries option from the menu. Upon
making this selection the Customer Subsidiary Entry Screen
will appear as shown below.
@scusno
Code
Enter code number.
@cusno
Customer Code
Enter the customer code to identify the customer in the
system.
@company
Customer Company
Enter the customer name for billing and shipping.
@name
Customer Name
Enter the customer name for billing and shipping.
@address1
Address - Line 1
Enter the first line of the customer's address.
@address2
Address - Line 2
Enter the second line of the customer's address
@city
City
Enter the customer address for billing and shipping.
@state
State
Enter the state for billing and shipping address.
@zip
Zip
Enter the Zip Code for the billing and shipping address.
@tx
Tax Code
Enter the Tax Code to represent the tax schedule for that
customer.
@sl
Sales Representative
Enter the Sales Representative representing that customer.
@contact
Contact Person
Enter the contact person in this field.
@phone
Telephone Number
Enter the telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@fax
Fax Telephone Number
Enter the Fax number for the customer.
@resale
Resale License Number
Enter the Resale Number for the customer.
@m
Method of Payment
Enter the method of payments applied "O" for Open Item, "B"
for Balance Forward.
@f
Finance Charge (Y/N)
Indicate if finance charges will be billed to the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, and "N" for No.
@i
Invoices Printed (Y/N)
Indicate if invoices will be produced for the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, and "N" for No.
@s
Statements Printed (Y/N/S)
Indicate if statements will be produced for the customer.
Valid entries are "Y" for Yes, "N" for No, and "S" to print
seperate statements for each subsidiary.
@tm
Terms Code
Enter the Terms Code for that customer. You may press the
HELP function key for a list of valid entries.
@prc
Price Code
This is the price code used for determining the sales price
for this customer.
@cred
Credit Code
Enter the credit code of the customer.
@credlimit
Credit Limit
Enter the credit limit for the customer.
@curbalance
Current Balance
This field displays the current balance.
@shp(shipcode)
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipname
Ship To: Name
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Addr1
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Addr2
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: City
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipstate
Ship To: State
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
act/help/arinvr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004321 05165726367 014416 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R INVOICE BATCH LISTING
=========================
This section describes how to print your invoice batches so
that errors can be discovered and corrected prior to
posting. Posting will be discussed in the next section.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated (R=Receivable and
I=Invoice).
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the beginning range of batch numbers you would like to
print.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter a batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning range of invoice numbers you would like
to print.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending range of Invoice numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter an Invoice range the computer
will print all Invoices.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the range of customer codes you would like to print.
If you do not enter a customer range the computer will print
all customers.
act/help/slord.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000030145 07022531626 014144 0 ustar infoflex users !slord
CUSTOMER SALES ORDER ENTRY
==========================
@ordno
Order No.
This is the unique order number assigned to each sales
order. This number will automatically be assigned the next
sequential number if you assigned a non zero valueto the
starting order number field in the control file. When
automatic numbering is active the phrase ***AUTO*** appears
in this field.
@orddate
Order Date
The date you wish to have printed on the saled order should
be entered here. The field defaults the system date.
@cusno
Customer
The customer field is where you will enter the customer's
code The customer code must be defined in the customer file
or an error will result. Pressing the HELP function key
will display a list of valid codes. ZOOMING while on the
HELP list will allow you to enter a new customer into the
customer file. When you cursor off the customer code
field, the customer's name and address information will be
displayed on the screen.
@company,addr1,addr2,city,state,zip
These fields represent the customer's address which is
automatically filled based on the customer code. These
fields are not enterable.
@shipcode
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipcompany
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipstate
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@tax
Tax Code
This data entry field is for entering the tax code.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes. After entering the tax code,the tax code desciption
and tax rate will be displayed on the screen.
@slm
Salesman
This data entry field allows you to enter the salesman code.
Pressing HELP function key will display a list of valid
code. After entering the salesman code, the salesman name
will be displayed on the screen.
@trm
Terms
This data entry field allows to enter the terms code
pressing the HELP function key will display a list fo valid
codes. After entering the terms code,the terms code
description and terms rate will be displayed on the screen.
@shipvia
Ship Via
The carrier used for shipping the order is enterd here.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System_wide control
file. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of
valid codes.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified for the warehouse entered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file.
@fob
FOB
This is freight on board description.
@poordno
PO#
This is the customer's purchase order number.
@refinvno
A/R Invoice #
If this order is credited or associated with another invoice
for this customer, enter the invoice number here. When this
order is posted to the A/R system, the amount of this order
will be added to the invoice specified here.
@remarks
Remarks
The remarks field is a data entry field which will print on
the sales order and can be used for special instruction to
the customer.
@status
Status and Status Flags
The status field is set by the system and indicates
the state of the overall order.
The status field is not modifyable, however, you can
change the status indirectly by modifying the status flags.
The status field can have one of three values:
Status Description
----------------------------------------------------
H The order is on HOLD. On HOLD
orders will not generate picking lists,
will not generate packing lists,
will be ignored by Back Order Release,
and can not be converted to an invoice.
A The order is ACTIVE. ACTIVE orders
can not be converted to an invoice.
C The order is COMPLETE and ready to convert.
The status is set based on meeting the order requirements
as defined on the Sales control file (see chapter 3).
If all order requirements are met, the order status
is set to COMPLETE.
The fields located after the status field are the status
flags and indicate the state of each order requirement.
All of these status flags are modifyable.
The first four status flags (Ord, Pic, Pak, Auth)
indicate whether the following actions have been done:
Print Order, Print Pick List, Print Packing List,
and Authorize Credit Card.
A flag value of BY means the action has been done,
N means the action has NOT been done and
blank means the action is NOT required.
If any of these flags are N, the order status
is set to ACTIVE.
The next set of status flags (Fil, Lim, Age) indicate
the results of the following checks: Fill percent,
Credit Limit and Age Credit Limit.
A flag value of Y means the check has succeeded,
N means the check has failed
and blank means the check is NOT required.
If any of these flags are N, the order status
is set to HOLD.
The last status flag is the manual hold flag. Setting
this flag to Y will set the order status to HOLD.
The order will remain on HOLD until this flag
is manually cleared. Following the manual hold flag field is
a 15 character field for entering a reason.
!slordlin
Line Items
==========
The Line Items screen is for entering each inventory item
ordered and their quantities.
@ordno
Order #
The sales order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@cusno
Customer
The customer ID entered on the prior screen is displayed
here followed by the customer's name.
@orddate
Order Date
The date entered on the prior screen is displayed in this
field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the sales
order.
@invenno
Item
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display a list of valid items. You may add or change
items by pressing the ZOOM function key from the HELP
subsystem.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity being ordered in this field.
@qtyco
Qty Commit
Enter the quantity to commit. The quantity you enter here
must be available in inventory otherwise you will be given a
warning. When this quantity is entered it is no longer
available for other orders.
@qtysh
Qty Shipped
Enter the quantity to ship. You will be given a warning if
the quantity specified is not available or is greater than
the commit quantity.
@price
Price/Unit
Enter the price per unit. This field defaults to the price
defined in the inventory price files. The unit field
displays the unit value from the inventory master.
@priceoext
Ext.Price
The extended price for the committed quantity is displayed
in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the sales order.
@reqdate
Required Date
The required date field is an unlabeled field located below
the commit quantity field. The required date defaults to
the order date and represents the date that the item is
required by the customer.
@taxable
Tax Flag
The tax flag field is an unlabeled field located below the
ship quantity field. The tax flag defaults to whatever the
taxable flag is set to on the inventory file. This flag is
"Y" if the item is taxable and "N" if the item is not
taxable. This field may be overridden by the user.
@
!slship
Ship To Popup
=============
@shp
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@company
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@city
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@st
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@zip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@tax
Tax Code
This field if for the applicable tax rate to be applied
to this order.
@slm
Salesman
This field is for the code of the salesperson to be
normally associated with this ship-to code.
@
!slordgl
Charges Screen
==============
This screen is for entering other charges associated with
the order.
While on the Charges screen, there are three supporting
screens for entering cash, check, or credit card payments.
All of these supporting screens are only active for lines
having an alias of "B" for bank.
The supporting screen for entering cash information is
accessed by entering an alias of "B" for bank and "$" for
type or by pressing the PAY function key (while on a charge
line with "B" and "$"). The cash entry popup screen will
appear as follows.
@glalia
Alias
Enter the G/L alias code for the charge being entered.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@description
Description
This is a display-only field showing the description for the
G/L alias.
@glprice
Order Price
This is the price based on order quantities.
@glprice2
Commit Price
This is the price based on commit quantities.
@glprice3
Ship Price
This is the price based on ship quantities.
act/help/glinvpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003112 05165726372 014567 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L INVOICE POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
This screen prints the journal report that will display the
batches that have been posted to the General Ledger. This
report must match the batch report (printed prior to the
posting).
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Enter post number you would like to print.
@invno1
Beginning Transaction Number
Enter the beginning range of transaction numbers you
would like to print.
@invno2
Ending Transaction Number
Enter the ending transaction number you would like to print.
If you do not enter a transaction range the computer will
print all transactions.
act/help/glinvpr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002541 05165726372 014575 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L TRANSACTION POSTING JOURNAL
===============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Enter post number you would like to print.
@glcode1
Enter the beginning range of account numbers you would
like to print.
@glcode2
Enter the ending range of account numbers you would like
to print. If you do not enter an account range the
computer will print all accounts.
act/help/arsubr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001706 05165726370 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT CUSTOMERS BY CODE
=======================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will default and print everything.
act/help/intfr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006372 05165726375 014165 0 ustar infoflex users !intfr
INVENTORY TRANSFER
==================
@s
Source
The source field is a display only field that displays the
source of the transaction: "I-T" stands for Inventory
Transfer.
@batch
Batch
The batch number is automatically assigned. This number
serves to uniquely identify a group of transfer entries for
both editing and auditing purposes. To return to an existing
batch, press the CHG function key then press the NEXT
function key until the correct batch is displayed.
@entdate
Entry Date
The entry date defaults to the system date. The entry date
represents the date the batch was entered into the computer.
@perdate
Period Date
The period date will also default to the system date. The
period date represents the period that the receipt should be
posted.
@lno
Line
The Line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented for each transfer line.
@whs
Warehouse
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse code
from which the item will be transfered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple warehouse option on the
System-wide control file.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code
from which the item will be transfered. This field will
automatically default to the division code specified in the
warehouse file. This field will only appear if you selected
the multiple division option on the System-wide control
file.
@whs2
Warehouse
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse code
to which the item will be transfered. This field will only
appear if you selected the multiple warehouse option on the
System-wide control file.
@div2
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code
to which the item will be transfered. This field will
automatically default to the division code specified in the
warehouse file. This field will only appear if you selected
the multiple division option on the System- wide control
file.
@trandate
Transaction Date
The transaction date defaults to the system date. The
transaction date represents the date assigned to the line
item.
@invenno
Item
The item field is a data entry field where your item number
for the item being transfered is entered. The HELP function
displays the contents of the inventory master file.
@qty
Qty
Enter the transfer quantity. When entering items on the
above Transfer Detail screen you will be required to enter
serial numbers for those items designated as serialized in
the inventory file. To access the serial number entry
screen, you will press the SNO Function key. Upon pressing
this key the following popup serial number entry screen will
appear.
@unit
Unit
The unit field displays the unit value from the inventory
master.
!inserial
SERIAL # ASSIGNMENT
===================
@serialno
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of each unit being transfered. If
the item was serialized, this number must be entered. To
return to the Transfer Detail screen from the serial screen,
press SAVE function key or ESCAPE key.
act/help/helpfunc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000010537 07342706041 014630 0 ustar infoflex users
The ACCOUNTFLEX system provides you many ACTION keys that help you
move around the system and get information quickly. When you hit an
ACTION key, the system immediately does what you want, as long
as it is appropriate in your situation. ACTION keys will work
differently depending on whether you are on a Menu or an Entry
Screen.
%
MENU ACTON KEYS:
================
B key - Instructs the system to move to the previous menu
from the one being displayed.
E key - Exits from the DEMO system and returns to the
computer's operating system.
ESCAPE key - Instructs the system to move to the previous menu
from the one being displayed.
ENTER/SAVE function-Instructs the to complete the selection
you have indicated.
%
MENU ACTON KEYS (cont.)
================
UP & DOWN arrow keys - Moves the highlighted cursor up or
down the menu list.
F3 Striking this key will allow you to chain
directly to another Menu.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS:
===================
ENTER - Instructs the system to accept
whatever value you have entered in a particular field.
ESCAPE - Striking the escape TWICE will exit you from the
data entry screen displayed and return you to the menu.
BACKSPACE - Use this key when you want to backspace and
remove the letters you back over.
LEFT & RIGHT arrow keys - Striking these keys will move left
or right within the field.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
UP & DOWN arrow keys - Striking these keys allows you to
move the cursor to the next or previous fields.
DEL Char key - Use this key to get rid of a letter without
having to retype the entire field.
INS Char key - Use this key to add a letter to your field
without having to retype the entire field.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
SAVE Striking this key will SAVE the data displayed on the
screen
HELP Strike this key if you need information about a screen,
field or function.
JUMP Striking this key will display a line at the bottom
of the screen outlining the options for "Jumping" to
other screens.
ADD/CHG Striking this key will change the mode to whichever is
currently being displayed: ADD or CHG.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
SRCH Striking this key will display a "SEARCH" screen
permitting the search records along any key sequence.
Once you have entered data in any search field, the
NEXT key is pressed to find the next closest match.
FIND Striking this key will commence the "Finding" of the record.
PREV When on a non-array screen field, striking this key will
locate the PREVIOUS record. When on an array screen field,
striking this key will display the PREVIOUS page of records.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
NEXT When on a non-array screen field, striking
this key will locate the NEXT record.
When on an array screen field, striking this key
will display the NEXT page of records.
FRST When on a non-array screen field, striking
this key will locate the FIRST record in the file.
When on an array screen field, striking this key
will display the FIRST page of records.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
LAST When on a non-array screen field, striking
this key will locate the LAST record in the file.
When on an array screen field, striking this key
will display the LAST page of records.
PRNT This key will print a report applicable to the screen
you are on.
%
SCREEN ACTION KEYS: (cont.)
===================
DEL Striking this key permits you to DELETE the record
that is displayed on the screen. A precautionary
prompt willalways be displayed after striking the
DELETE key to make sure that data is not
inadvertantly erased.
ZOOM Striking this key will expand the applicable field
into a screen display that will permit more detailed
entry. In Table Help you can zoom to the table for
updating.
act/help/slanarc.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005234 05165726406 014455 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES ANALYSIS REPORT BY CUSTOMER, ITEM, INVOICE
================================================
This menu option is for sales analysis report by customer
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/jllbrr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002773 05165726400 014401 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
JOB COST LABOR BATCH LISTING
============================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@module
Source
This is not a required entry field. The source represents
where the transaction originated.
@batch1
Beginning Batch Number
Enter the begining range of batch numbers you would like to
print .If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
@batch2
Ending Batch Number
Enter the ending range of batch numbers you would like to
print. If you do not enter batch range the computer will
print all batches.
act/help/slanarg.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005223 05165726406 014457 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES ANALYSIS REPORT BY GROUP, ITEM, INVOICE
=============================================
This menu option is for sales analysis report by group
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/slanari.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005206 05165726406 014462 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES ANALYSIS REPORT BY ITEM, INVOICE
=======================================
This menu option is for sales analysis report by item
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/apven.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006076 07466326702 014151 0 ustar infoflex users !apven
VENDOR ENTRY SCREEN
===================
This section describes how to set up your vendors. It is
important that your vendors be set up properly prior to
entering invoices.
To ADD a new vendor press the ADD function key (F4) to
switch the screen to ADD mode. You will know whether you are
in ADD mode by the mode message that appears at the top of
the screen. Once in ADD mode, the first field you will enter
is the vendor code. Your vendor code will identify the
vendor throughout the system. After entering the vendor
code, press the Return key to enter the next field on the
screen. When you have filled in all of the vendor fields,
press the SAVE function key (F1) to save the vendor
information. Upon pressing the SAVE key the screen clear and
make itself ready for the next vendor addition.
CHANGE
To CHANGE an existing vendor first be sure you are in CHANGE
mode by pressing the CHG function key (F4) if necessay. You
will know whether you are in CHANGE mode by the mode message
that appears at the top of the screen. Once you are in CHANG
mode, enter the vendor code you wish to locate and press the
Return key. The vendor information will then be displayed an
you may cursor to any field (except the vendor code) and cha
its contents. If you would like to search for vendors by nam
may do so by pressing the SRCH function key. The Search
function is described in Chapter 2. After you have made
changes you wish, press the SAVE function key (F1) to s
changes.
@venno
Vendor Code
Enter the vendor code to identify the vendor in the system.
@name
Name
Enter the vendor name for payments.
@address1
Address
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@address2
Address - Line 2
Enter the vendor address for payments.
@city
City
Enter the vendor city for payments.
@state
State
Enter the vendor state for payments.
@zip
Zip Code
Enter the vendor zip code for payments.
@contact
Vendor Contact
Enter the contact person in this field.
@phone
Contact Telephone Number
Enter the telephone number needed to reach the contact
person.
@fax
FAX Telephone Number
Enter the Fax number for the vendor.
@resale
Tax ID Number
Enter the Federal ID number or Social Security Number for
the vendor.
@m
Method of Payment
Enter the method of payment. Valid entries are "O" for Open
Item, and "B" for Balance Forward.
@f
FOB Point
Enter how Freight On Board will be handled. Valid entries
are "D" for Destination, and "S" for Ship Point.
@w
1099 Vendor (Y/N)
Enter if 1099 will be issued for vendor. Valid entries are
"Y" for Yes, and "N" for No.
@dy
Statement Cutoff Day
Enter statement cutoff day for vendor.
@usetaxflag
Is purchase from vendor subject to Use Tax ?
Enter 'Y' if always true, 'P' if possibly true, or leave
blank if purchases are never subject to Use Tax.
@glcode
Default G/L Expense Account
Enter the normal G/L expense account to use for charges.
@tc
Terms Code
Enter the Terms Code for that vendor.
@curbalance
Current Balance
This field displays the current balance due.
act/help/sltaxr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003365 05165726414 014351 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES TAX REPORT
================
This menu option is for sales tax report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@tx2
Beginning Tax Code
Enter the begining tax code you want to print.
@tx1
Ending Tax Code
Enter the ending tax code you want to print.
@invdate1
Beginning Invoice Date
Enter the begining dates for the invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@invdate2
Ending Invoice Date
Enter the ending dates for the invoices you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
act/help/apinvp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002615 05165726362 014330 0 ustar infoflex users !select
POST INVOICE BATCHES
====================
This section describes how to post your batches to the Open
Invoice file. The General Ledger file will be updated if it
is interfaced with Accounts Payable. It is important that
your invoices be correctly entered before posting. This is
because once your data has been posted it can no longer be
modified unless you enter and post an adjustments using the
Adjustments Entry section.
You may press the SAVE function key to begin POSTING or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT. Please note the before and after posting
instructions displayed on the screen.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the Data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Source
The source of the invoice will be displayed here. The source
represents where the transaction originated (P=Payable and
O=Orders).
Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
Invoice
The invoice number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here.
When the posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Accounts Payable menu.
act/help/archkpr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003150 05165726365 014544 0 ustar infoflex users !select
A/R RECEIPT POSTING JOURNAL
===========================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@postno
Post Number
Enter post number you would like to print.
@chkno1
Beginning Check Number
Enter the beginning range of check numbers you would like
to print.
@chkno2
Ending Check Number
Enter the ending range of check numbers you would like to
print.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning range of customer codes you would like
to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending range of customer codes you would like to
print. If you do not enter a customer range the computer
will print all customers.
act/help/slanars.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005235 05165726406 014476 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES ANALYSIS REPORT BY SALESMAN, ITEM, INVOICE
=================================================
This menu option is for sales analysis report by salesman
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/argen.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004352 05165726367 014134 0 ustar infoflex users
ACCOUNTFLEX - Accounts Receivable
The AccountFlex Accounts Receivable module tracks amounts
owed by customers and permits the automatic or manual
application of customer payments to specific invoices.
Below are some of its features:
* Provides for recurring billing.
(more)
* Allows selection and payment of invoices by discount, due
date, transaction date, invoice number, division, and/or
numerous other fields.
* Handles both open-item and balance-forward accounts.
* Allows unlimited partial receipts for any invoice.
* Let's you customize statements.
(more)
* Prints the Aged Trial Balance report and the Statements
as of any transaction date range.
* Allows entry of new months transactions before having posted
last months transactions.
* Prints Statements for all clients or for a range of clients.
* Allows runtime selection of aging periods for Aged Trial
Balance and Statements.
(more)
* Allows posting of invoices to any period in any year.
* Allows Prepayment of invoices.
* Maintains Receipt Register and allows Reversal of previously
posted Receipts.
* Allows extensive on-screen inquiries such as customer
balances, aging and invoice history.
* Supports multiple divisions.
(more)
* Maintains clear and concise audit trails showing source,
transaction date, entry date, posting dates, descriptions,
and all original document reference codes (i.e. customer
code, invoice number, etc.).
* Performs automatic error trapping to ensure data integrity.
* Includes comprehensive user manuals, on-screen help,
on-screen report viewing, sample data and a menu-driven
user interface.
(more)
This module is written in Infoflex, an SQL based 4GL language that
is compatible with Informix, SCO Integra, Micro Focus Cobol,
or SUN Netisam data bases. If necessary, this module can be
customized by our staff.
act/help/slanarw.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000005237 05165726407 014505 0 ustar infoflex users !select
SALES ANALYSIS REPORT BY WAREHOUSE, ITEM, INVOICE
=================================================
This menu option is for sales analysis report by warehouse
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@invdate1
Beginning Required Date
Enter the first date to report on.
@invdate2
Ending Required Date
Enter the last date to report on.
@whs
Beginning Warehouse Code
Enter the first Warehous Code to report on.
@wh2
Ending Warehouse Code
Enter the last Warehouse Code to report on.
@invenno1
Beginning Product Code
Enter the first Product Code to report on.
@invenno2
Ending Product Code
Enter the last Produst Code to report on.
@grp1
Beginning Inventory Group Code
Enter the first Group Code to report on.
@grp2
Ending Inventory Group Code
Enter the last Group Code to report on.
@cat1
Beginning Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the first Catalog Code to report on.
@cat2
Ending Inventory Catalog Code
Enter the last Catalog Code to report on.
@venno1
Beginning Vendor Number
Enter the first Vendor to report on.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the last Vendor to report on.
@sl1
Beginning Salesperson Number
Enter the beginning salesperson to report on.
@sl2
Ending Salesperson Number
Enter the ending salesperson to report on.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/porcvp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001633 05165726402 014336 0 ustar infoflex users !select
POST RECEIVINGS
===============
You may press the SAVE function key to begin POSTING or the
ESCAPE key to EXIT.
As the posting takes place, the screen will display the
following information.
Processing Statistics
To the right of this screen label, the pass description will
be displayed. There are three passes that will take place.
Pass 1 verifies the data, pass 2 posts the data, and pass 3
clears the data.
Purchase Order Number
The purchase order number being processed is displayed here.
Purchase Order Batch
The batch number that is currently being posted will be
displayed here. The message displayed in this field once
posting has been completed will reflect the last batch
posted.
When the Posting has been completed you will see the
following message:
Posting has been Successfully Completed.
Once this message appears, you may then press the ESCAPE key
to return to the Purchase Order menu.
act/help/porcvr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004062 05165726402 014337 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT P/O RECEIVINGS
====================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@rptjobs
Report Jobs
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Job distribution detail should be printed on the report.
@rptserial
Report Serials
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the Serial Number detail should be printed on the report.
@invno1
Beginning PO#
Enter the begining purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@invno2
Ending PO#
Enter the ending purchase order numbers you want
to print.
@podate1
Beginning PO# Date
Enter the begining dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@podate2
Ending PO# Date
Enter the ending dates for the purchase orders you wish to
print. All purchase orders with dates between those entered
will be print.
@venno1
Begining Vendor Number
Enter the begining vendor ID numbers for the vendors you
wish to print.
@venno2
Ending Vendor Number
Enter the ending vendor ID numbers for the vendors you wish
to print.
act/help/tbjobr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003057 05165726415 014376 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@jobno1
Beginning Job Number
Enter the number of the first job you would like included on
this report. If no job numbers are entered, all jobs will
be included on the report.
@jobno2
Ending Job Number
Enter the number of the last job you would like included on
this report. If a beginning number was specified and no
ending number was specified, then only the beginning number
job will be on the report. If no beginning number is
specified and an ending number is specified, then all jobs
up to the ending number will be included on the report.
act/help/pychkr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004147 05165726403 014412 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL REPORT
==============
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill with appropriate values. When you are sure all your
entries are correct press the RUN function key to run the
payroll report.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code you would like to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print checks
for all employees. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code you would like to print. If you do not
enter a group code, the program will print all checks.
@paybegin
Beginning Pay Date
Enter the beginning pay date you want the report to include.
If you do not enter a pay date range, the program will print
all checks.
@payend
Ending Pay Date
Enter the ending pay date you want the report to include. If
you do not enter a pay date range, the program will print
all checks.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the check date you would like to print. If you do not
enter a check date, the program will print all checks.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
act/help/glrecp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001671 05165726372 014311 0 ustar infoflex users !select
G/L COPY RECURRING TRANSACTIONS
===============================
This section describes how to copy recurring transactions.
This process will create a batch of transactions that may be
reviewed and posted in the same manner as transactions that
are entered manually.
@invdate
Invoice Date
Enter invoice date you would like to print.
@perdate
Period Date
Enter period date you would like to print.
@refco1
Beginning Reference Code
Enter the beginning range of refcode you would like to copy
invoices for.
@refco2
Ending Reference Code
Enter the ending range of refcode you would like to copy
invoices for.
@invno1
Beginning Reference Number
Enter the beginning range of refno's you would like to copy
invoices for.
@invno2
Ending Reference Number
Enter the ending range of refno's you would like to copy
invoices for. If you do not enter a refno range the
computer will copy everything.
act/help/jcjobr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000003056 05165726377 014373 0 ustar infoflex users !select
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@jobno1
Beginning Job Number
Enter the number of the first job you would like included on
this report. If no job numbers are entered, all jobs will
be included on the report.
@jobno2
Ending Job Number
Enter the number of the last job you would like included on
this report. If a beginning number was specified and no
ending number was specified, then only the beginning number
job will be on the report. If no beginning number is
specified and an ending number is specified, then all jobs
up to the ending number will be included on the report.
act/help/pyempyr1.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001706 05165726405 014617 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL QUATERLY REPORT (Summary)
=================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@qtr
Number of Quarter
Enter the number of the quarter for the "Payroll Quarterly
Report".
@year
Year
Enter the year for the "Payroll Quarterly Report".
@paytype
Pay Type
Enter a select pay type. If no pay type is selected, all
pay types will be reported.
act/help/pyempyr2.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000006522 05165726405 014621 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PAYROLL QUATERLY REPORT (Employee)
==================================
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code you would like to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print checks
for all employees. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
@qtr
Number of Quarter
Enter the number of the quarter for the "Payroll Quarterly
Report".
@year
Year
Enter the year for the "Payroll Quarterly Report".
@paytype
Pay Type
Enter a select pay type. If no pay type is selected, all
pay types will be reported.
!select
PAYROLL REPORT
==============
This screen has a number of fields which you will need to
fill with appropriate values. When you are sure all your
entries are correct press the RUN function key to run the
payroll report.
@empno
Employee Code
Enter the employee code you would like to print. If you do
not enter an employee code, the program will print checks
for all employees. The employee code must exist in the
employee table. Press the HELP function key to see a list of
valid entries.
@paygroup
Pay Group Code
Enter the group code you would like to print. If you do not
enter a group code, the program will print all checks.
@paybegin
Beginning Pay Date
Enter the beginning pay date you want the report to include.
If you do not enter a pay date range, the program will print
all checks.
@payend
Ending Pay Date
Enter the ending pay date you want the report to include. If
you do not enter a pay date range, the program will print
all checks.
@trandate
Check Date
Enter the check date you would like to print. If you do not
enter a check date, the program will print all checks.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Enter a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to ten can
be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you enters.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for yes or "N" for no to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
act/help/help.doc 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002561 05165726372 013746 0 ustar infoflex users
1) Every ".flx" file will have a corresponding ".hlp" file.
The directory "/act/help" has all the ".flx" files that will
need to be converted to ".hlp" files.
2) Each ".flx" file may have one or more screens; each
screen will have one or more fields.
To find each screen and its fields in the documentation do as follows:
a) If its a report selection screen then locate using the name of
the ".flx" file.
In the case of reports the screen name you will use in the
".hlp" file will always be "select" not the name used in the
document.
b) If its a data entry screen then in most cases you can locate
using the name of the ".flx" file.
This is at least true for the first screen in the "flx"
file. If there is more than one screen in the ".flx" file then
these other screens should be close by in the documentation.
If the name of the screen in the document is different than in the ".flx"
file, always use the screen name defined in the ".flx" file for the
screen name in the ".hlp" file.
3) Screen fields that are marked as "nodisplay" will not
need to be listed in the "hlp" file.
4) Where "\fB" appears replace with "\B" and
where "\fP" appears remove it.
"\B" will indicate Bolding of a word.
sometimes you will need to bold each word within a "\fB", "\fP" range.
act/help/indivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001654 05165726373 014332 0 ustar infoflex users !select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
This menu option is for usage division report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@div
Division Name
Enter division name.
act/help/jcdivr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002034 05165726377 014315 0 ustar infoflex users
!select
DIVISION REPORT
===============
This menu option is for usage division report
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@div
Division Number
Enter the division number that you wish listed on this
report. If no number is entered, all divisions will be
reported.
act/help/arrecp.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000002204 05165726367 014306 0 ustar infoflex users !select
COPY RECURRING INVOICES
=======================
This section describes how to copy recurring invoices.
Copying recurring invoices will create a batch of invoices.
These invoices can be reviewed and posted in the same manner
as invoices that are manually entered.
Refno Range
Enter the range of refno's you would like to copy invoices
for. If you do not enter a refno range the computer will
copy everything.
@invdate
Invoice Date
Enter here the date you wish assigned to the invoices being
generated by this copy.
@perdate
Period Date
Enter here the period to which you wish these invoices to
post.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the beginning customer number you would like to copy
invoices for. If you do not enter a customer range the
computer will copy all of the customer's invoices.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer number of the range you wish to
process.
@invno1
Beginning Invoice Number
Enter the beginning invoice number that you wish to process.
@invno2
Ending Invoice Number
Enter the ending number of the invoices you wish to process.
act/help/poord.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000021470 06720553650 014152 0 ustar infoflex users !poord
PURCHASE ORDER ENTRY
====================
@invno
Purchase Order #
This is the unique purchase order number assigned to this
purchase. This number will automatically be assigned the
next sequential number if you assigned a non zero value to
the starting order number field in the control file. When
automatic numbering is active the phrase ***AUTO*** appears
in this field.
@trandate
Order Date
The date you wish to have printed on the purchase order
should be entered here. The field defaults to the system
date.
Status (R) (I)
There are 2 Status fields to indicate the (R)eceiving and
the (I)nvoice status of the purchase order. The status
fields may take on values of either "O" or "C" indicating
that the order is Open or Closed.
@venno
Vendor
The vendor field is a data entry field for the vendor's
code. The vendor code must be defined in the vendor file or
an error will result. Pressing the HELP function key will
display a list of valid codes. ZOOMING while viewing the
HELP list will allow you to enter a new vendor into the
vendor file. When you cursor off the vendor code field, the
vendor's name and address information will be displayed on
the screen.
@name
Name,Address,City,St,Zip Code
These fields represent the vendor's address which is
automatically filled based on the vendor code. These fields
are not enterable.
@shipcode
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@shipname
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipaddress2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipcity
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipstate
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@shipzip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@buy
Buyer
This data entry field allows you to enter the buyer's code.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@trm
Terms
This data entry field allows you to enter the terms code.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@whsname
Warehouse
This data entry field allows you to enter the warehouse
code. This field will only appear if you selected the
multiple warehouse option on the System-wide control file.
Pressing the HELP function key will display a list of valid
codes.
@div
Division
This data entry field allows you to enter the Division code.
This field will automatically default to the division code
specified in the warehouse file. This field will only appear
if you selected the multiple division option on the
System-wide control file. Pressing the HELP function key
will display a list of valid codes.
@orderby
Ordered By
This is an additional field for specifying description
information as to who the vendor contact is for this order.
@reqdate
Date Required
This is the date the order is required.
@shipvia
Ship VIA
The carrier you want to enter on your purchase order will be
entered here.
@fob
FOB
This is the freight on board field.
@tax_memo
Tax Memo
This is place to record the amount of what the tax, if any,
is expected to be. It is documentary only.
@remarks
Remarks
The remarks field is a data entry field which will print on
the purchase order and can be used for special instructions
to the vendor.
@
!polines
Order Detail Screen (MULTI-RECORD)
==================================
@invno
Purchase Order #
The purchase order number assigned on the prior screen is
displayed here. This is a display only field.
@venno
Vendor
The vendor ID entered on the prior screen is displayed here
followed by the vendor's name.
@trandate
Order
The date entered on the prior screen is displayed in this
field.
@lno
Line
The line field displays the line number for the item about
to be entered. This is a display only field which is
automatically incremented as items are added to the purchase
order.
@invenno
Item Number
The Item field is a data entry field where your part number
for the item being ordered is entered. The HELP function
will display the contents of the Inventory Master file, and
you can use the ZOOM function from the HELP table to Add to
or Change the Inventory Master file.
@veninvenno
Vendor Item
This field defaults to the vendor part number in the
Inventory Master file, however, alphanumeric characters can
be entered into this field.
@qtyor
Qty Ord
Enter the quantity you are ordering in this field.
@qtyre
Qty Rec
This field is empty until goods are received on the purchase
order.
@cost
Cost/Unit
Enter the cost per unit ordered. This value will print on
the purchase order and defaults to the cost value contained
in the inventory master file. The unit field displays the
unit value from the inventory master.
@costext
Ext.Cost
The extended cost is displayed in this field.
@description
Description
The unlabeled description field defaults to the description
from the Inventory Master file for this part number. This
field may be modified to reflect whatever information you
wish to print on the purchase order.
@jobno
Job Number
The job number for which this product is being ordered
should be entered here. If there is no job number being
used, and the product is for stock replenishment, leave this
field blank.
@etadate
Estimated Arrival Date
Enter here the estimated arrival date of the order. If a
job number entry was made in the last field, the date shown
here will be the earliest date entered under the jobs
fields.
@whs
Warehouse Number
This field is the warehouse as identified on the first page
of the p/o entry form.
@
!poship
Ship To Popup
=============
@shipcode
Ship To Code
This is the code representing where the order is to be
shipped. Pressing the HELP function key will display a list
of valid codes.
@name
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address1
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@address2
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@city
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@state
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
@zip
Ship To: Name, Addr1, Addr2, City, State, Zip
These fields represent the address where the order is to be
shipped. These fields may be assigned as a result of
entering a Ship To Code or may be entered directly.
!ponote
@note
The NOTE function key is functional throughout the purchase
order entry process and is used to enter notes about the
purchase order.
!ponote2
@note
The NOTE function key is functional throughout the purchase
order entry process and is used to enter notes about the
purchase order.
act/help/slpackr.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000004012 05165726414 014461 0 ustar infoflex users !select
PRINT PACKING LIST
==================
This menu option is for print packing list
This screen has a number of entry fields which you will need
to fill in with appropriate values. When you are sure all
your entries are correct, press the RUN funtion key to run
the orders report.
@rptdest
Report Destination
Enter the report destination. Four options are available:
S - Screen
P - Printer
D - Disk
A - Auxiliary Port
Entering a "S" will output the report display to the screen.
Entering a "P" will cause printer output to be routed to the
default printer. To route output to alternative printers you
would enter the printer's device name after the "P". The
auxiliary port is a port leading out of many terminals.
@rptcopies
Number of Report Copies
Enter the number of report copies you want. One to 10 copies
can be specified.
@rpttitle
Report Title Page
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not a
title page should be printed for the report. A report title
page is simply a copy of the Report Selection Screen with
the values you entered.
@rptnoprint
Report Detail
Enter "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to indicate whether or not
the report detail should be printed on the report.
@ordno1
Starting Order Number
Enter the begining sales order number you want to print.
@ordno2
Ending Order Number
Enter the ending sales order number you want to print.
@podate1
Starting Order Date
Enter the begining dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dates between those entered
will be printed.
@podate2
Ending Order Date
Enter the ending dates for the sales orders you wish to
print . All sales orders with dated between those entered
will be printed.
@cusno1
Begining Customer ID Number
Enter the begining customer ID number for the customers
you wish to print.
@cusno2
Ending Customer ID Number
Enter the ending customer ID number for the customers you
wish to print.
act/help/poinveni.hlp 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000001571 05165726400 014653 0 ustar infoflex users
!poinveni
INVENTORY INQUIRY SCREEN
========================
@invenno
Inventory Code
Enter the item number you are researching. The item number
must be defined in the inventory file. The HELP function key
is operable for this field and will display the Inventory
Master.
Pressing the SAVE function key after you have selected a
part number will cause the On-order screen to appear.
!poeta
The fields on this screen are display only fields and are
intended for use in ascertaining the status of items on open
orders.
@etadate
ETA Date
The ETA Date field displays the estimated time of arrival
date from the purchase order Detail file.
@whs
Warehouse
The warehouse the product was ordered for.
!potran
@trandate
Order Date
The date of the purchase order is displayed here.
@whs
Warehouse
The warehouse the product was ordered for.
act/cgi-bin/actwebenv 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000000103 07312460021 014554 0 ustar infoflex users FXDIR=/home/fx
FXAPDIR=/home/act
WEBHOME=http://www.ambassador.com
act/cgi-bin/actmenu.html 0000644 0001750 0000144 00000025457 07310756361 015235 0 ustar infoflex users
Accountflex Report Menu
ACCOUNTFLEX REPORT MENU
Sales
Quote
Quote|slrept $sysform.slrecr
Quote (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slrecl
Quote (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slrecw
Quote (Internal)|slrept slrecr2
Order
Order|slrept $sysform.slordr
Order (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slordl
Order (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slordw
Order (Internal)|slrept slordr2
Picking List|slrept $sysform.slpickr
Picking List (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slpickl
Picking List (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slpickw
Packing List|slrept $sysform.slpackr
Packing List (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slpackl
Packing List (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slpackw
Invoice
Invoice|slrept $sysform.slinvr
Invoice (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slinvl
Invoice (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slinvw
Invoice (Internal)|slrept slinvr2
Shipping Report|slrept slinvr5
Picking List|slrept $sysform.slpikr
Picking List (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slpikl
Picking List (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slpikw
Packing List|slrept $sysform.slpakr
Packing List (Graphical)|slrept $sysform.slpakl
Packing List (Pre-printed form)|slrept $sysform.slpakw
Batch G/L Journal|slrept slglr1 - - - S I
Journal|slrept slinvpr1
Payments Journal|slrept slinvpr2
Payments by Type Journal|slrept slinvpr3
Backorder Report
by Item, Require Date|slrept slbckri
by Group, Item, Require Date|slrept slbckrg
by Warehouse, Item, Require Date|slrept slbckrw
by Customer, Item, Require Date|slrept slbckrc
by Salesman, Item, Require Date|slrept slbckrs
by Vendor, Item, Require Date|slrept slbckrv
by Require Date|slrept slbckrdr
Bookings Report
by Item, Order Date|slrept slbokri
by Group, Item, Order Date|slrept slbokrg
by Warehouse, Item, Order Date|slrept slbokrw
by Customer, Item, Order Date|slrept slbokrc
by Salesman, Item, Order Date|slrept slbokrs
by Order Date|slrept slbokrdo
Sales Journal Report
by Invoice, Invoice Date|slrept sljrnr
by Customer, Invoice Date|slrept sljrnrc
Sales History
by Item, Invoice Date|slrept slhisri
by Group, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slhisrg
by Warehouse, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slhisrw
by Customer, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slhisrc
by Salesman, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slhisrs
by Invoice Date|slrept slhisrdi
Sales Analysis
by Item, Invoice Date|slrept slanari
by Group, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slanarg
by Warehouse, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slanarw
by Customer, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slanarc
by Salesman, Item, Invoice Date|slrept slanars
Miscellaneous Reports
Sales Tax Report|slrept sltaxr
Royalty Due Report|slrept slroyr1
Commission Report|slrept slcomr1
Advance Payment Report|slrept slcredr1
Tables
Division|slrept sldivr
Regions|slrept slregnr
Bill of Materials
Where Used|bmrept bmbomr2
Pick List|bmrept bmpickr
Pick List by Loc|bmrept bmpickr2
Purchase Order
Order/Receiving
Order|porept $sysform.poordr
Order (Graphical)|porept $sysform.poordl
Order (Pre-printed form)|porept $sysform.poordw
Receiving Batch|porept porcvr
Invoice Reconciliation
Invoice Batch|porept poinvr
Invoice Batch Journal|porept poinvpr1
Invoice Batch G/L Journal|porept poglr1 - - - O I
Miscellaneous Reports
Recurring Orders|porept porecr1
Open Orders by PO|porept poordr1
Open Orders by Item,Eta Date|porept poordr2
Uninvoiced Receivings|porept poordr3
Tables
Division|porept podivr
Inventory
Adjustment
Batch|inrept inadjr1
Batch G/L Journal|inrept inglr1 - - - I A
Batch Journal|inrept inhisr1 - - - I A
Transfer
Batch |inrept intfrr1
Batch G/L Journal|inrept inglr1 - - - I T
Batch Journal|inrept inhisr1 - - - I T
Physical Counts
Worksheet|inrept inwrkr
Count|inrept inphyr1
Batch|inrept inphyr2
Batch Journal|inrept inglr1 - - - I P
Batch Journal|inrept inhisr1 - - - I P
Reorder Reports
By Item|inrept inreori
By Group, Item|inrept inreorg
By Warehouse, Item|inrept inreorw
By Vendor, Item|inrept inreorv
Valuation Reports
By Item|inrept invalri
By Group, Item|inrept invalrg
By Warehouse, Item|inrept invalrw
Usage Reports
By Item, Ship Date|inrept inuseri
By Group, Item, Ship Date|inrept inuserg
By Warehouse, Item, Ship Date|inrept inuserw
ABC Usage Report|inrept inuserq
Demand Reports
By Item, Require Date|inrept indmdri
By Group, Item, Require Date|inrept indmdrg
By Warehouse, Item, Require Date|inrept indmdrw
Inactive Reports
By Item|inrept inactri
By Group, Item|inrept inactrg
By Last Sale Date, Item|inrept inactrds
Pricing Reports
Customers Codes|inrept inprcr1
Inventory Codes|inrept inprcr2
List by Items|inrept inprcr3
List by Customer|inrept inprcr4
Tables
Vendor|inrept apvenr
Account|inrept glcoar
Division|inrept indivr
Inventory by Item|inrept invenr
Inventory by Description|inrept invenrd
Inventory by Group, Item|inrept invenrg
Inventory Labels|inrept invenrm
Job Cost
Material
Batch|jcrept jcmtlr1
Journal|jcrept jcmtlpr1 - - - J M
G/L Journal|jcrept jcglr1 - - - J M
Labor
Batch|jcrept jclbrr1
Journal|jcrept jclbrpr1 - - - J L
G/L Journal|jcrept jcglr1 - - - J L
Job Close
Batch|jcrept jcclsr1
Journal|jcrept jcclspr1 - - - J C
G/L Journal|jcrept jcglr1 - - - J C
Miscellaneous Reports
Part List|jcrept jcjobr1
Tables
Jobs by No|jcrept tbjobr1
Jobs by Description|jcrept tbjobr2
Division|jcrept jcdivr
Employee|jcrept pyempr1
Earning|jcrept pyearnr1
Accounts Receivable
Invoice
Batch|arrept arinvr1
Journal|arrept arinvpr1
G/L Journal|arrept arglr1 - - - R I
Adjustment
Batch|arrept aradjr1
Journal|arrept aradjpr1
G/L Journal|arrept arglr1 - - - R A
Receipt Batch
Batch|arrept archkr1
Journal|arrept archkpr1
G/L Journal|arrept arglr1 - - - R C
Statement
Statement|arrept $sysform.arstmntr
Statement (Graphical)|arrept $sysform.arstmntl
Statement (Pre-printed)|arrept $sysform.arstmntw
Receipt Register
By Customer By Date|arrept arregr1
By Check No|arrept arregr2
Miscellaneous Reports
Aged Trial Balance|arrept artrial
Cash Flow Report|arrept cfarr1
Invoice Journal|arrept aropenr1
Distribution Journal|arrept aropenr2
Customer Journal|arrept aropenr3
Tables
Customer By Customer Code|arrept arcusr
Customer By Customer Name|arrept arcusr2
Customer Mailing Label|arrept arcusrm
Customer Mail Labels|arrept armailr
Subsidiary|arrept arsubr
Division|arrept ardivr
Accounts Payable
Invoice
Batch|aprept apinvr1
Journal|aprept apinvpr1
G/L Journal|aprept apglr1 - - - P I
Adjustment
Batch|aprept apadjr1
Journal|aprept apadjpr1
G/L Journal|aprept apglr1 - - - P A
Check
Batch|aprept apchkr1
Print|aprept $sysform.apchkw
Journal|aprept apchkpr1
G/L Journal|aprept apglr1 - - - P C
Check Register
By Check Number|aprept apregr2
By Vendor By Date|aprept apregr1
Miscellaneous Reports
Aged Trial Balance|aprept aptrial
Cash Flow Report|aprept cfapr1
Invoice Journal|aprept apopenr1
Distribution Journal|aprept apopenr2
Vendor Journal|aprept apopenr3
1099's |aprept ap1099r1
Tables
Vendor By Vendor Code|aprept apvenr
Vendor By Vendor Name|aprept apvenr2
Subsidiary|aprept apsubr
Division|aprept apdivr
General Ledger
Transactions
Batch|glrept glinvr1
Journal|glrept glinvpr1
Miscellaneous Reports
Journals by Date|glrept glcoar1
Journals by Account Code|glrept glcoar2
Trial Balance|glrept gltrial
Income Statement|glrept glincom
Balance Sheet|glrept glbal
Report Specification|glrept glrptr
Tables
Account|glrept glcoar
Budget|glrept glcoabr
Forecast|glrept glcoabr - - - - A
Bank Reconciliation
Statement|brrept brinvr1
Outstanding Checks/Deposits|brrept brinvr2
G/L Journal|brrept brglr1 - - - B A
Payroll
Process Checks
Payroll|pyrept pychkr1
Print Checks|pyrept $sysform.pychkw
Check Journal|pyrept pychkpr1
G/L Journal|pyrept pyglr1 - - - E C
History Reports
Summary|pyrept pyhisr1
By Employee|pyrept pyhisr2
Distribution|pyrept pyhisr3
Earning Audit|pyrept pyhisr4
Employer Expense|pyrept pyhisr5
Deduction Register|pyrept pyhisr6
Deduction Register 2|pyrept pyhisr7
Quarterly Reports
Summary|pyrept pyempyr1
By Employee|pyrept pyempyr2
Earning Register|pyrept pyhisqr1
Earning Register by Dept|pyrept pyhisqr5
Earning Register Summary|pyrept pyhisqr6
Overtime Paid|pyrept pyhisqr7
Tax Status (Federal)|pyrept pyhisqr2
Tax Status (Medicare)|pyrept pyhisqr3
Tax Status (State)|pyrept pyhisqr4
Tax Status (Worker's Comp)|pyrept pyhisqr8
Personnel Reports
Employee by Hire Date|pyrept pyempr11
Vacation Accrual|pyrept pyempr12
Workers Comp|pyrept pyempr13
Employee Review Dates|pyrept pyempr14
Insurance Census|pyrept pyempr15
401K Contributions|pyrept pyempr16
Personnel Change Notice Forms|pyrept pyempr40
Blank Personnel Change Notice Forms|pyrept pyempr41
Check Register
List|pyrept pyregr1
w/Tax|pyrept pyregr2
Miscellaneous Reports
940-EZ report|pyrept py940ez
941 report|pyrept py941
W-2 form|pyrept pyw2
State Reports
Utah|pyrept pystutr
Ohio|pyrept pystohr
California (DE6)|pyrept pystcar
Washington (L&I)|pyrept pystwar1
Washington (SUI)|pyrept pystwar2
Tables
Employee|pyrept pyempr1
Account|pyrept glcoar
Departments|pyrept pydivr
Earning|pyrept pyearnr1
Deduction|pyrept pydedr1
Tax|pyrept pytaxr1
act/cgi-bin/act.pl 0000755 0001750 0000144 00000046135 07314207011 014001 0 ustar infoflex users #!/usr/bin/perl -w
use CGI;
use FXUT qw(fxabort);
use FXDB;
use File::Basename;
my $MENUFILE = "actmenu.html";
my $CALLSELF = "http://$ENV{HTTP_HOST}$ENV{SCRIPT_NAME}";
setactwebenv();
$login = getpwuid($<);
my $db = new FXDB;
$db->connect($ENV{FXDB}, $login);
my $cgi = CGI::new();
my $action = $cgi->param("action");
my $userid = $cgi->param("userid");
my $password = $cgi->param("password");
# if ($action eq "LOGIN") {
# print "Set-Cookie: actlogin=$userid,$password\n";
# }
my $picpath;
my $webpath;
my $rpttitle = $cgi->param("rpttitle");
my $execline = $cgi->param("execline");
my $execpath;
my $execname;
my $picname;
my $args;
if (defined $execline) {
$execline =~ /^\s*(\S+)\s+(\S+)\s*(.*)$/;
$execname = $1;
$picname = $2;
$args = $3 if (defined $3);
if ($picname =~ /^\$sysform\.(\S+)$/) {
my $column = $1;
my $cursor = $db->SQLprepare("select $column from sysform");
$cursor->SQLexecute();
($picname) = $cursor->SQLfetchrow();
}
if (defined $args) {
my @args = split '\s+', $args;
if (@args > 3) {
shift @args;
shift @args;
shift @args;
}
$args = join ' ', @args;
}
$picpath = "$picname.pic";
$webpath = "$picname.web";
}
my $selectpath = "$ENV{FXTEMP}/$userid.def";
print $cgi->header();
print "\n";
# print "HTTP_COOKIE: $ENV{'HTTP_COOKIE'}";
if ($action eq "" || $action eq "LOGOUT") {
login();
html_trailer(1);
}
elsif ($action eq "LOGIN") {
if (loginverify() < 0) {
login();
html_trailer(1);
}
else {
reportmenu();
html_trailer(2);
}
}
elsif ($action eq "REPORTMENU") {
my $cryptuserid = $cgi->param("cryptuserid");
if ($cryptuserid eq crypt($userid, "ACT")) {
reportmenu();
}
else {
print "
\n";
return(-1);
}
my $cursor = $db->SQLprepare("select usercode, password, menuprogram from webuser where usercode = ?");
$cursor->SQLexecute($userid);
my ($table_userid, $table_password, $table_menuprogram) = $cursor->SQLfetchrow();
if (defined($table_menuprogram) && $table_menuprogram !~ /^\s*$/) {
$MENUFILE = $table_menuprogram;
}
if ($password eq "goact") { # security bypass
return(0);
}
if ($userid ne $table_userid) {
print "
Invalid Login name !!!
\n";
return(-1);
}
elsif ($password ne $table_password) {
print "
Invalid password !!!
\n";
return(-1);
}
return(0);
}
sub reportmenu
{
my $indent_count;
open (INPUT, "$MENUFILE") or die "Can't open report $MENUFILE: $!\n";
while () {
chomp;
if ($_ !~ /^\s*$/ && $_ !~ /^\s*\
$titleline\n";
}
else {
if ($execline =~ /\$sysform\.(\S+)/) {
my $column = $1;
my $cursor = $db->SQLprepare("select $column from sysform");
$cursor->SQLexecute();
($picname) = $cursor->SQLfetchrow();
if (!defined $picname || $picname eq "") {
next;
}
}
print "
\n";
next;
}
print "$_\n";
}
close INPUT;
return(0);
}
sub reportselect
{
my $mode = $_[0];
# mode = 0 means first time thru
# 1 means report failed and are re-displaying select screen
if ($picname eq "") {
print "
Report not implemented
\n";
exit;
}
if ($mode == 0) { # first time thru (not returning from report error)
# if web form does not exist create from picfile
if (!-e $webpath) {
my $cmd = "$ENV{FXDIR}/bin/fxpw $picpath $webpath";
# print "$cmd ";
if (fxsystem($cmd) != 0) {
exit;
}
}
# Get Defaults by running report program with special param 'W'
FXUT::Remove($selectpath);
my $cmd = "$ENV{FXBIN}/$execname $picname S 1 NYW,$selectpath $args";
# print "$cmd ";
if (fxsystem($cmd) != 0) {
exit;
}
}
print "$rpttitle\n";
print "
\n";
print "";
if (! -e $webpath) {
FXUT::fxlog("$webpath does not exist $!\n");
print "
RUN REPORT
\n";
print "
\n";
print "\n";
print "\n";
return(0);
}
sub reportrun
{
FXUT::Remove($selectpath);
my $reporttype = "";
if ($picname eq "tminvr") {
$reporttype = "HTML";
}
if (-e $webpath) {
my $rtnflag = 0;
open (INPUT, "$webpath") or die "Can't open report $webpath: $!\n";
my %hashdefault = ();
while ( my $line = ) {
chomp $line;
my @list = split '\|', $line;
foreach(@list) {
$_ =~ s/^(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove trailing spaces
}
my ($prompt, $type, $size, $miscattr, $comment, @cols) = @list;
for (my $col_count = 0; $col_count < @cols; $col_count++) {
my @colparms = split '\,', $cols[$col_count];
my $value = $cgi->param($colparms[0]);
if (chkdbcol($prompt, $type, $miscattr, $cols[$col_count], \$value) < 0) {
$rtnflag = -1;
}
$hashdefault{$colparms[0]} = $value; # save nulls
# next if (!defined($value) || $value eq "");
}
}
close INPUT;
fxwritedefault($selectpath, \%hashdefault);
if ($rtnflag == -1) {
return(-1);
}
}
print "$rpttitle\n";
print "";
print "\n";
print "\n";
if ($reporttype ne "HTML") {
print "
$rpttitle
";
}
if ($reporttype ne "HTML") { # if Report in HTML code then no
!!!
print "
\n";
}
my $cmd = "$ENV{FXBIN}/$execname $picname SOUT 1 NYR,$selectpath $args";
# print $cmd;
if (fxsystem($cmd) != 0) {
}
if ($reporttype ne "HTML") {
print "
\n";
}
print "\n";
return(0);
}
sub fxreaddefault
{
$pathname = $_[0];
my %hash = ();
if (! -e $pathname) {
return(%hash);
}
open (DEFFILE, "$pathname") or die "Can't open report $pathname: $!\n";
my $title = ;
chomp $title;
if ($title !~ /\!select/) {
fxabort("Format error reading $pathname: no screen name on first line ($title)");
}
while (my $line = ) {
chomp $line;
my ($colname, $colvalue) = split '=', $line;
$colname =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
$colvalue =~ s/^(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove trailing spaces
$hash{$colname} = $colvalue;
}
close DEFFILE;
return(%hash);
}
sub fxwritedefault
{
my $pathname = $_[0];
my $hash_ref = $_[1];
my %hash = %$hash_ref;
open (DEFFILE, ">$pathname") or die "Can't open report $selectpath: $!\n";
print DEFFILE "!select\n";
foreach(keys %hash) {
if ($hash{$_} eq "null" || $hash{$_} eq "NULL") {
$hash{$_} = "";
}
print DEFFILE " $_=$hash{$_}\n";
}
close DEFFILE;
}
sub fxsystem
{
my $cmd = $_[0];
my $return = system($cmd);
my $status = ($? >> 8); # Child status
if ($status != 0) {
print "fxsystem($cmd) failed with status=$status, return=$return";
}
return($status);
}
sub setactwebenv
{
my $SCRIPTFILE = "actwebenv";
open (INPUT, "$SCRIPTFILE") or die "Can't open report $SCRIPTFILE: $!\n";
while () {
if (!defined($_) || $_ =~ /^\s*$/) {
next;
}
my ($var, $path) = split '\=', $_;
$var =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
$path =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
$ENV{$var} = $path;
}
close INPUT;
my ($path, $suffix);
($ENV{FXDB}, $path, $suffix) = fileparse($ENV{FXAPDIR});
if (!exists $ENV{FXDATA} && exists $ENV{FXAPDIR} ) {
$ENV{FXDATA} = "$ENV{FXAPDIR}/$ENV{FXDB}.dbs";
}
if (!exists $ENV{DBPATH} && exists $ENV{FXAPDIR} ) {
$ENV{DBPATH} = "$ENV{FXAPDIR}";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXBIN} && exists $ENV{FXAPDIR} ) {
$ENV{FXBIN} = "$ENV{FXAPDIR}/bin";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXDEFAULT} && exists $ENV{FXAPDIR} ) {
$ENV{FXDEFAULT} = "$ENV{FXAPDIR}/defaults";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXTERM} ) {
$ENV{FXTERM} = "web";
}
if (!exists $ENV{SQLRUN} ) {
$ENV{SQLRUN} = "y";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXRUN} ) {
$ENV{FXRUN} = "y";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXDBTEMP} ) {
$ENV{FXDBTEMP} = "/tmp";
}
if (!exists $ENV{FXTEMP} ) {
$ENV{FXTEMP} = "/tmp";
}
return(0);
}
sub chkdbcol
{
my $prompt = $_[0];
my $type = $_[1];
my $miscattr = $_[2];
my $col = $_[3];
my $ref_value = $_[4];
my $value = $$ref_value;
if ($miscattr =~ /upshift/) {
$$ref_value = uc($value);
$value = $$ref_value;
}
if ($col =~ /required/ &&
($value =~ /^\s*$/ || $value eq "null")) {
print $cgi->h2("$prompt is a required entry !!!");
return(-1);
}
if ($value ne "") {
if ($type eq "serial" || $type eq "long" ||
$type eq "smallint" || $type eq "integer" || $type eq "int") {
$value =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
if ($value !~ /^[\-\+0123456789]/) {
print $cgi->h2("$prompt must be NUMERIC ($value) !!!");
return(-1);
}
}
if ($type eq "money" || $type eq "decimal" || $type eq "float") {
$value =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
if ($value !~ /^[\.\-\+0123456789]/) {
print $cgi->h2("$prompt must be NUMERIC ($value) !!!");
return(-1);
}
}
if ($type eq "date") {
$value =~ s/^\s*(.*?)\s*$/$1/; # remove surrounding spaces
if (dbchkdate($value) < 0) {
print $cgi->h2("$prompt has Invalid date: use 'MMDDYY' !!!");
return(-1);
}
}
}
return(0);
}
sub dbchkdate
{
my $date = shift(@_);
my ($month, $day, $year);
if ($date =~ /\//) {
my @date = split '\/', $date;
$month = $date[0];
$day = $date[1];
$year = $date[2];
}
else {
my @date = split '', $date;
if (@date == 6) {
$month = $date[0] . $date[1];
$day = $date[2] . $date[3];
$year = $date[4] . $date[5];
}
if (@date == 5) {
$month = $date[0];
$day = $date[1] . $date[2];
$year = $date[3] . $date[4];
}
}
# my $value = "$month\/$day\/$year";
# print $value;
if ($month >= 1 && $month <= 12 &&
$day >= 1 && $day <= (0,31,29,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)[$month] &&
(($year >= 1950 && $year <= 2025) || ($year >= 0 && $year <= 25) || ($year >= 50 && $year <= 99)) ) {
return(0);
}
return(-1);
}
=head2 getcurdate
Get Current Date in MM/DD/YYYY format
=cut
sub getcurdate
{
my $curdate;
my ($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst) = localtime(time);
$curdate = $mon+1;
$curdate .= "/" ;
$curdate .= $mday;
$curdate .= "/";
$curdate .= $year+1900;
return($curdate);
}
=head2 html_select_list
Generates HTML code for a selection list.
=cut
sub html_select_list
{
my $fieldname = $_[0];
my $value_list = $_[1];
my $default_value = $_[2];
my $required = $_[3];
my $value;
my $return_value = "
